AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

AMT-70 Series
(with AMT-73 Supplement)
(with AMT-75 Supplement)

L-Band Satellite Modem

32k - 40 MSymbol
BPSK, QPSK, OQPSK, 8PSK, 16QAM,
32APSK

Installation and Operations Manual

Version 2.14- Dec 4, 2007

1
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

PREFACE
Thank you for purchasing the world’s first 16 kbps to >100 MBits L-Band digital satellite modem.
This document describes the installation, operation, and maintenance of the AMT-70 series satellite
modem.
The following information provides the document part number, revision, the copyright notices, along
with the pertinent FCC, English, German, and French compliance, and the serviceability of the
modem.

Document Part Number and Revision:

Revision Date Docum ent Revision

History:
V1.0 March 19, 2004 First release of AMT-70 (Beta)
Modifications, replacing back panel, adding Instructions tree.
V1.1 Added a section of the AMT-70 TPC codes, added text on
July 4, 2004
applications, added a section on demodulator acquisition
settings

Specified connectors. Added page 7-10 with Figure 42 for

V1.2 Aug. 31, 004
back panel connectors and associated table

Alarm / Relay; Redundancy Support Added

RS485 Terminal Mode Support Added
Oct 25, 2004 IFRXDOPFIFO – IFTXCLKRECOV Interface commands
V1.3 added.
Fixed documentation typo error.

Corrected for Rev. Version levels

V1.4 Nov. 21, 2004
Changed all reference from baud to symbol
- TUNITS/RUNITS - BPS/SPS parameter usage
documented (Page 102).
- New commands for setting the Ethernet ports P6/P2
from the modem interfaces (Pages 4-12, 5-20)
- New RS485 commands
- New packet protocol support (page 112)
- Configuration store support (Page 4-17, 4-18)
- RRMVMK command added (Page 105)
V1.5 Dec 10, 2004 - TOUTPUT / S BAND option not supported anymore
(Page 104 )
- TLEVEL now supports in 0.1 dBm increment (Page 104)
- TCODE / RCODE now supports OM73 parameters options
(Page 103)
- TRATE / RRATE now supports the parameter UNCODED
(Page 103).
- TFREF / RFREF commands support
(page 7-3)

2.0 Nov 21, 2004 Total Reformat of Manual

2
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
- Changed RS-485 pin-out to reverse TX+ & TX-
- Created Appendix A from previous sections of manual
regarding Antenna & cable info
- Added Appendix B, (S+N)/N Conversion Charts
2.1 Jan 19, 2005
- Added Mod and Demod Fault Status and pin-outs
- Changed ifrxclock in Packet Protocol section (Chapter
12) to read “0=internal; 1=demod (was external)
- Updated Front Panel Display Menus
- Updated Connector section – added reference to AMT-
70 and AMT-73L
- Changed MONITOR RX POWER.AGC to reflect dB
- Update Packet Protocol Section 7.3 to
Version 1.17Y
- Updated Configuration Option Chart to Version 3
- Inserted new drawings to reflect AMT-70 and 73L front
and rear panels
- Added paragraphs in Chapter 4 plus simplified block
diagram to reflect Clocking, Loopback functions, and
BER testing.
- Added paragraph on setting Continuous Carrier Mode
- Added Appendix B to include Eb/No to (S +N)/N
Conversion Charts
2.2 Feb 26, 2005 - Added ¾ Rate eTPC to AMT-70/73 Technical specs.
- Changed TREF to TFREF in paragraph 2.8 and added
support in paragraph 3.2.
- Added packet protocol update (Chapter 12).
- Added AMT-70L/73L Demod Input Level versus Symbol
Rate Charts in Appendix A.
- Upgraded Packet Protocol to V1.19
- Removed and incorporated Section 6 with Section 4.
- Added static DEFAULT Commands
- Moved Chapter 12 to Chapter 7 – for better flow of the
document
- Changed Chapter 4 Title to MODEM M&C
INTERFACES
- Added Quick Start Guide to Chapter 4
- Reformatted manual.
2.3 Mar 20, 2005
- Made correction to several text errors.
- New Front-Panel interface design
- Commands IFTDINV , IFRDINV. IFBUFMON
added for the data interface.
- RSPANL new parameter AUTO
2.4 June 20, 2005 - LOG subsystem enhancements
- Updated INTERFACE card sections
- Updated REDUNDANCY chapter
- RS485CONF, NETCONF new commands
- Packet Protocol Changes to V1.18

2.5 June 30, 2005 - SNMP support added

2.6 Aug 11, 2005 - AERo Embedded Router support added

3
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
- Real Time Clock Support added.
- ASI interface VBR support
- DVBS2S – DVBS2N support
- New TPILOT commands for DVBS2S – DVBS2N
- New eTPC code rates ¾, 7/8, 19/20
2.7 Dec 18, 2005 - RPOWER support for AMT73L
- Buffer Re-center Support for RS530+1*HSSI card.
- New Summary alarm page
- New LED function for AMT70
- TTPCS / RTPCS commands added
- Turbo Performance Graphs added

2.8 Feb 22, 2006 - Added RS530/HSSI Redundancy Support

- Added AMT75 DVB-S2 support

- Minor updates to Technical specifications
2.9 April 05, 2006 - Added Chapter 16 DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance
- Added Octal E1 card support

2.10 Nov. 17, 2006 - Added AHPG support

2.11 Dec. 15, 2006 - Added G.703 Interface support

2.12 March 21, 2007 - Added 32APSK support

- Pilots Insertion description added

2.13 June 15, 2007
- Equalizer description added

2.14 Dec 5, 2007 - Added eTPC and Intelsat values for AMT75

2.1 July 15, 2008 - Corrected eTPC BER vs SNR plots

4
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Copyright Notices:

Copyright ©2004-2005 by AdvantechAMT. All rights reserved. This manual may not be reproduced
or disclosed in whole or in part by any means without the written consent of AdvantechAMT, Inc.

Customer Support:

You can contact AdvantechAMT for customer support at the following office;

Head Office

AdvantechAMT
657 Orly Avenue
Dorval, Quebec
H9P 1G1

Tel: 1 (514) 420 0045

Fax: 1 (514) 420 0073
Email : [email protected]

The following offices also provide technical support for the modems and other RF products:

U.S. Office European Office

AdvantechAMT U.S., Inc. AdvantechAMT Europe Ltd.
4710 E. Elwood Street 39 Edison Road
Suite 14 St. Ives, Huntingdon
Phoenix, AZ, 85040 Cambridgeshire, PE27 3LF

Tel: 1 (480) 784-4646 Tel: 44 (1480) 357 600

Fax: 1 (480) 784-1010 Fax: 44 (1480) 357 601

You can also visit our website at http://www.advantechamt.com

5
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Chapter 1 INTRODUCTION......................................................................................32
1.1 The AMT-7X Family..................................................................................................................32
1.2 Product Overview ....................................................................................................................33
1.2.1 AMT-70/75 Description ........................................................................................................ 33
1.2.2 AMT-73L Description ........................................................................................................... 34
1.3 Ordering the Products Options..............................................................................................35
Chapter 2 INSTALLATION.......................................................................................37
2.1 Introduction..............................................................................................................................37
2.2 Unpacking and Inspection......................................................................................................37
2.2.1 Unpacking ............................................................................................................................ 37
2.2.2 Inventory............................................................................................................................... 37
2.2.3 Site Considerations .............................................................................................................. 37
2.2.4 Installing the unit .................................................................................................................. 37
2.3 Power Requirements...............................................................................................................38
2.3.1 AC Power & Fuse................................................................................................................. 38
2.3.2 DC Power & Fuse................................................................................................................. 38
2.4 Modem Rack/Shelf Support....................................................................................................38
2.5 Data Connections (AMT-70 Series)........................................................................................39
2.5.1 Data Port RS-530 ................................................................................................................. 40
2.5.2 Data Port HSSI..................................................................................................................... 40
2.5.3 Data Port Ethernet................................................................................................................ 40
2.5.4 Monitor and Control RS-232 ................................................................................................ 40
2.5.5 Monitor and Control RS-485 ................................................................................................ 40
2.5.6 Monitor and Control 10/100BaseT Ethernet ........................................................................ 40
2.5.7 Monitor and Control Alarms ................................................................................................. 40
2.5.8 Redundancy ......................................................................................................................... 40
2.6 Data Connections (AMT-73L Series) .....................................................................................40
2.6.1 Data Port EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-114 ........................................................................... 40
2.6.2 External Clock Reference (MIL-STD-188-115).................................................................... 41
2.7 RF/IF Interfaces........................................................................................................................41
2.7.1 Modulator L-Band Output (AMT-70L) .................................................................................. 41
2.7.2 Modulator L Band Output (AMT-73L)................................................................................... 41
2.7.3 Demodulator L Band Input (AMT-70L and 75)..................................................................... 41
2.7.4 Demodulator L-Band Input (AMT-73L)................................................................................. 42
2.7.5 Demodulator 70/140 MHz IF Input (AMT-70 and AMT-75).................................................. 42
2.8 Bringing the Modulator Online...............................................................................................42
Chapter 3 OPERATIONAL FEATURES...................................................................45
3.1 M&C Interface Descriptions....................................................................................................45
3.2 Acquisition, FEC, Modulation, and Eb/No.............................................................................46
3.2.1 Demodulator Acquisition Tips .............................................................................................. 46
3.2.2 Choice of FEC ...................................................................................................................... 47
3.2.3 Pilots Insertion...................................................................................................................... 49
3.2.4 Equalizer .............................................................................................................................. 49
3.2.5 Link Budget Analysis and Eb/No (Viterbi and Viterbi R/S)................................................... 50
3.3 Modem Applications and Typical Operating Scenarios ......................................................52
3.3.1 DVB (MPEG-2) Modulator.................................................................................................... 53
3.3.2 Data Broadcast Modulator ................................................................................................... 53
3.3.3 SCPC Modem ...................................................................................................................... 53
3.3.4 Bandwidth-On-Demand Modem .......................................................................................... 53
3.3.5 Broadcast Mode ................................................................................................................... 53

6
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
3.4 Default, Memory Store and Recall Modes .............................................................................54
3.4.1 The default configuration......................................................................................................54
3.4.2 Programmable Memory Configurations ............................................................................... 55
3.5 Clock Options and Buffers – Standard Interface Card ........................................................56
3.5.1 Transmit Timing.................................................................................................................... 58
3.5.1.1 Internal Clock (SCT)..................................................................................................... 58
3.5.1.2 External (Terrestrial) Clock (SCTE) ............................................................................. 58
3.5.1.3 Loop Timing (SCR)....................................................................................................... 58
3.5.1.4 RS530TFD Clock Recovery ......................................................................................... 58
3.5.2 Receive Timing..................................................................................................................... 58
3.5.2.1 Doppler Buffer Auto...................................................................................................... 58
3.5.2.2 Doppler Buffer Enabled – Internal ST Clocking (SCT) ................................................ 59
3.5.2.3 Doppler Buffer Enabled – External TT Clocking (SCTE) ............................................. 59
3.6 Loop-back, Pure Carrier, and BER Test Functions..............................................................59
3.6.1 Data Interface Near End/Far End Loop-back....................................................................... 59
3.6.2 Data System Near End/Far End Loop-back......................................................................... 61
3.6.3 IF Loop-back ........................................................................................................................ 61
3.6.4 Pure Carrier Mode................................................................................................................ 61
3.6.5 Internal BER Test Pattern Generator and Tester................................................................. 61
3.6.6 BER Measurement ............................................................................................................... 62
3.7 ASI Interfaces...........................................................................................................................62
Chapter 4 ACTIVE FRONT PANEL..........................................................................63
4.1 Quick Start Guide ....................................................................................................................63
4.1.1 Bench Test Setup................................................................................................................. 63
4.1.2 Placing Modem Online ......................................................................................................... 65
4.2 The Front Panel........................................................................................................................66
4.2.1 Panel Indicators.................................................................................................................... 66
4.2.2 Keypad & Display ................................................................................................................. 68
4.2.3 Welcome Menu .................................................................................................................... 69
4.2.4 Main Menu............................................................................................................................ 69
4.2.5 Menu Tree Structure ............................................................................................................69
4.2.5.1 TX Menu ....................................................................................................................... 71
4.2.5.1.1 The Transmit Menu ............................................................................................... 71
4.2.5.1.2 Available settings and parameters........................................................................ 72
4.2.5.2 RX Menu ...................................................................................................................... 73
4.2.5.2.1 The available Settings and Parameters ................................................................ 73
4.2.5.3 INTERFACE Menu ....................................................................................................... 75
4.2.5.4 MONITOR Menu .......................................................................................................... 77
4.2.5.5 FUNCTION Menu......................................................................................................... 81
4.2.5.5.1 The INFORMATION submenu .............................................................................. 81
4.2.5.5.2 The CONFIGURATION submenu......................................................................... 81
4.2.5.5.3 The CONTROL submenu...................................................................................... 82
4.2.5.5.4 The CONTROL/PORTS/NETWORK option.......................................................... 82
4.2.5.5.5 The CONTROL/PORTS/RS485 option ................................................................. 83
4.2.5.5.6 The CONTROL/BUC submenu ............................................................................. 84
4.2.5.5.7 The CONTROL/LNB submenu ............................................................................. 84
4.2.5.5.8 The CONTROL/LCD submenu ............................................................................. 84
4.2.5.5.9 The TESTS submenu............................................................................................ 85
4.2.5.5.10 The REBOOT option ........................................................................................... 85
4.2.6 Executing Variable Commands from the Front Panel.......................................................... 85
Chapter 5 MANAGING THE MODEM ......................................................................87
5.1 Using the RS-232 Port .............................................................................................................87
5.2 Using RS-485 Rear Panel Remote M&C ................................................................................87
5.3 Using the Ethernet Port ..........................................................................................................88
7
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
5.4 Starting the Modem .................................................................................................................88
5.5 Login to the modem ................................................................................................................89
5.6 Setting the Security .................................................................................................................90
5.7 Setting the modem date and time ..........................................................................................90
5.8 Using the Modem Shell ...........................................................................................................91
5.8.1 Command Format ................................................................................................................ 91
5.8.1.1 Command Help ............................................................................................................ 91
5.8.2 Commands Recall and Editing............................................................................................. 91
5.8.2.1 Commands Completion Mode...................................................................................... 92
5.8.2.2 Command Completion Mode ....................................................................................... 92
5.8.3 Scheduling Periodic Commands .......................................................................................... 93
5.9 Configuring the RS-485 Port ..................................................................................................93
5.10 Accessing the Modem through a Network ...........................................................................94
5.10.1 Configuring the network address ......................................................................................... 94
5.10.2 Configuring the routing tables .............................................................................................. 94
5.10.3 Using Telnet for Remote Control.......................................................................................... 95
5.11 Using FTP for Software Download ........................................................................................96
5.11.1 Downloading from the RS-232 Serial Port ........................................................................... 97
5.12 Using SNMP .............................................................................................................................98
5.12.1 Introduction........................................................................................................................... 98
5.12.2 How to configure SNMP....................................................................................................... 98
5.12.3 The SNMP MIB source file................................................................................................... 99
5.13 Modem events and logging ....................................................................................................99
5.13.1 The SNMP traps.................................................................................................................100
5.13.2 Using the log file.................................................................................................................100
Chapter 6 THE MODEM COMMAND SET ...............................................................102
6.1 Introduction............................................................................................................................102
6.1.1 The Command Syntax .......................................................................................................102
6.1.2 The Modulator/Demodulator Standard Commands ...........................................................102
6.1.3 The Modulator Specific Commands...................................................................................104
6.1.4 The Demodulator Specific Commands ..............................................................................105
6.1.5 Getting the Chassis Configuration and Status ...................................................................106
6.1.6 The Monitor and Control Commands.................................................................................106
6.1.7 The Interface Commands...................................................................................................108
6.1.7.1 ASI Interface Commands ...........................................................................................108
6.1.7.2 RS530 + 1*HSSI interface..........................................................................................108
6.1.7.3 3*HSSI Interface.........................................................................................................109
6.1.7.4 High-performance Gateway (AHPG) .........................................................................110
Chapter 7 USING THE RS-485 PORT......................................................................111
7.1 The RS-485 Control Commands...........................................................................................111
7.2 The Command Mode .............................................................................................................111
7.3 The Packet Protocol ..............................................................................................................112
Chapter 8 CABLES AND PIN-OUTS........................................................................113
8.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements .................................................................................113
8.2 RS-442/449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable ..................................................................................114
8.3 RS-422/449 to RS-530 Y-Cable .............................................................................................115
8.4 RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs (AMT-70) ...........................................................................116
8.5 HSSI Connector Pin-Outs .....................................................................................................117
8.6 RJ-45 Ethernet M&C Connector Pin-Outs...........................................................................117
8.7 RJ-45 Ethernet IP Router Connector Pin-Outs (AMT-73L) ................................................118
8.8 RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs .................................................................................................118
8.9 RS-232 Null Modem Cable Assembly ..................................................................................118

8
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
8.10 RS-485 Connector Pin-Outs .................................................................................................119
8.11 EIA/TIA-449 AMT-73L Connector Pin-Outs .........................................................................119
8.12 RJ-45 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-73L) ..........................................................................................120
8.13 Front panel RJ-11 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-70/75)...................................................................120
8.14 Front panel RJ-11 to PC 9-pin RS-232 Adapter cable........................................................121
8.15 SSPB/Modem Cabling Requirements ..................................................................................121
8.16 Alarms Connector Description.............................................................................................122
8.17 L-Band Transmit Cable .........................................................................................................122
8.18 L-Band Receive Cable ...........................................................................................................122
8.19 DB15 – DB15 – Switch Cable................................................................................................123
Chapter 9 TURBO CODING DETAILS.....................................................................124
9.1 Turbo Product Code Overview.............................................................................................124
9.2 AMT7X family TPC Overview ................................................................................................125
9.2.1 CRCs and Scrambling........................................................................................................125
9.2.2 Framing ..............................................................................................................................126
9.2.3 Calculating the Code Rate .................................................................................................126
9.3 3rd Party TPC Familes............................................................................................................128
Chapter 10 BUC AND ADVANTECH SSPB ..............................................................129
10.1 SSPB (BUC) Interface Connections.....................................................................................129
10.2 LNB Interface Connections ..................................................................................................129
10.3 RS-232 M&C Interface Connections ....................................................................................129
10.4 AMT-70 Modem Configuration .............................................................................................129
10.5 TX Carrier Enable...................................................................................................................130
Chapter 11 REDUNDANCY........................................................................................131
11.1 Hardware Installation ............................................................................................................131
11.1.1 ASI Interface.......................................................................................................................131
11.1.2 RS-530 / HSSI interface.....................................................................................................133
11.1.2.1 Front panel push buttons .......................................................................................136
11.1.2.2 LED indicators ........................................................................................................136
11.2 Software Configuration.........................................................................................................137
11.3 Messages................................................................................................................................140
Chapter 12 APPENDIX A SYSTEM CONSIDERATIONS ..........................................141
A.1 Typical AMT-70L/AMT-73L Interconnections.....................................................................141
A.1.1 Setting the transmit levels ..................................................................................................141
A.2 LNB, BUC & Antenna Installation ........................................................................................143
A.2.1 Choosing the LNB & BUC ..................................................................................................143
A.2.2 LNB Physical Installation....................................................................................................143
A.2.3 Antenna Alignment .............................................................................................................143
A.2.4 Satellite Position.................................................................................................................143
A.2.5 Antenna Pointing Angles....................................................................................................144
A.2.6 Pointing the Antenna ..........................................................................................................145
A.2.7 Input Level Range Versus Symbol Rate ............................................................................146
Chapter 13 APPENDIX B S/N TO Eb/No CONVERSION ..........................................148

Chapter 14 APPENDIX C EMBEDDED ROUTER......................................................152

Chapter 15 APPENDIX D HIGH-PERFORMANCE GATEWAY ..............................155

15.1 Getting Started.......................................................................................................................157
15.1.1 Modem M&C configuration.................................................................................................157

9
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
15.1.2 Router module configuration ..............................................................................................158
Chapter 16 APPENDIX E G.703 TELECOMMUNICATIONS
GATEWAY 161
16.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements .................................................................................161
16.1.1 RS-232 Console Connector (J3)........................................................................................162
16.1.2 Overhead D-Sub 15 pin Connector (J14) ..........................................................................162
16.1.3 RJ-45 Ethernet Console Connector Pin Out (J5)...............................................................163
16.1.4 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 1-4 (J16/1/2/3/4)...........................................................163
16.1.5 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 5-8 (J17/1/2/3/4)...........................................................165
16.1.6 FXS Dual RJ-11 Telephone Interface (J13).......................................................................166
16.2 Command Set.........................................................................................................................167
16.2.1 Help ....................................................................................................................................167
16.2.2 Recall and Editing ..............................................................................................................168
16.2.3 Command Syntax...............................................................................................................168
16.2.4 Commands for the Telecommunications Gateway ............................................................169
16.2.5 Commands to set up individual E1 channels .....................................................................170
16.2.6 Mux Controller set-up commands ......................................................................................171
16.2.7 Mux Controller set-up commands – Transmit side ............................................................172
16.2.8 Mux Controller set-up commands – Receive side .............................................................173
16.3 Configuration examples of AMT-70 modem equipped with PDH multiplexer.................174
16.3.1.1 To change a current Insert or Drop range..............................................................174
16.3.1.2 To store the current configuration ..........................................................................174
16.3.2 Example 1 ..........................................................................................................................174
16.3.3 Example 2 ..........................................................................................................................176
16.3.4 Example 3 ..........................................................................................................................178
16.3.5 Example 4 ..........................................................................................................................179
16.3.6 Example 5 ..........................................................................................................................180
16.3.7 Example 6 ..........................................................................................................................180
16.3.8 Example 7 ..........................................................................................................................181
Chapter 17 APPENDIX F TURBO PRODUCT CODE PERFORMANCE ................182

Chapter 18 APPENDIX G DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance .................................195

10
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

LIST OF FIGURES
FIGURE 1: THE AMT-7X FAMILY .............................................................................................................. 33
FIGURE 2: AMT-70 FAMILY: PRODUCTS CONFIGURATION OPTIONS .......................................................... 36
FIGURE 3: RACK MOUNT SUPPORT KIT..................................................................................................... 39
FIGURE 4: BUC CONTROL COMMANDS .................................................................................................... 41
FIGURE 5: FEC / MODE / RATE CONFIGURATION CHART ....................................................................... 49
FIGURE 6: ALLOCATED BANDWIDTH AND EB/NO FOR VITERBI AND VITERBI + REED SOLOMON ................... 52
FIGURE 7: FUNCTIONAL BLOCK DIAGRAM OF AMT-70/73L MODEM .......................................................... 56
FIGURE 8: AMT-70L OR AMT-73L LOOPBACK CABLE ASSEMBLY ........................................................... 63
FIGURE 9: PARAMETER CHANGES IN TEST MODE ..................................................................................... 64
FIGURE 10: MODEM COMMANDS QUICK START GUIDE .............................................................................. 65
FIGURE 11: THE AMT-70 FRONT PANEL.................................................................................................. 67
FIGURE 12: THE AMT-73L ACTIVE FRONT PANEL ................................................................................... 67
FIGURE 13: THE AMT-73L FRONT PANEL LEDS..................................................................................... 68
FIGURE 14: KEYPAD BUTTONS AND THEIR USAGE. ................................................................................... 69
FIGURE 15: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY TX (TRANSMIT) MENU ....................................................................... 72
FIGURE 16: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY RX (TRANSMIT) MENU....................................................................... 74
FIGURE 17: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY INTERFACE MENU. ........................................................................ 76
FIGURE 18: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY MONITOR MENU ............................................................................. 77
FIGURE 19: FRONT PANEL DISPLAY FUNC (FUNCTION) MENU. ................................................................ 82
FIGURE 20: ACCEPTABLE PARAMETERS FOR FEC TYPE........................................................................... 86
FIGURE 21: BOOTING THE MODEM............................................................................................................ 89
FIGURE 22: LOGIN TO THE MODEM IN COMMAND LINE MODE (CLI)............................................................ 89
FIGURE 23: CHANGING THE SECURITY CODE (PASSWORD) ....................................................................... 90
FIGURE 24: LISTING THE MODEM COMMAND SET ....................................................................................... 91
FIGURE 25: MODEM SHELL FUNCTION KEYS .............................................................................................. 91
FIGURE 26: USING THE COMMAND COMPLETION MODE .............................................................................. 92
FIGURE 27: USING THE COMMAND COMPLETION MODE (PART #2) .............................................................. 92
FIGURE 28: SCHEDULING MONOTONIC COMMANDS .................................................................................... 93
FIGURE 29: CLI COMMAND SET FOR RS-485. ......................................................................................... 93
FIGURE 30: CONFIGURING THE TX NETWORK ADDRESS ............................................................................ 94
FIGURE 31: CONFIGURING THE RX NETWORK ADDRESS ........................................................................... 94
FIGURE 32: CONFIGURING THE STATIC ROUTING TABLES ........................................................................... 95
FIGURE 33: LOGIN USING TELNET ............................................................................................................ 95
FIGURE 34: DOWNLOADING SOFTWARE USING FTP.................................................................................. 96
FIGURE 35: THE MODEM LOG EVENTS....................................................................................................... 99
FIGURE 36: THE REDUNDANCY SYSTEM LOG EVENTS ..............................................................................100
FIGURE 37: AMT70 COMMAND SYNTAX .................................................................................................102
FIGURE 38: AMT-70 STANDARD (L-BAND OR 70 MHZ) CONFIGURATIONS ..............................................102
FIGURE 39: MONITOR SPECIFICS COMMANDS .........................................................................................104
FIGURE 40: DEMODULATOR SPECIFIC COMMANDS..................................................................................105
FIGURE 41: MONITOR COMMANDS SUMMARY .........................................................................................106
FIGURE 42: RS530 + 1*HSSI COMMANDS SUMMARY ............................................................................108
FIGURE 43: 3*HSSI COMMANDS SUMMARY............................................................................................109
FIGURE 44: AHPG ROUTER COMMANDS SUMMARY ...............................................................................110
FIGURE 45: BACK PANEL CONNECTORS FOR AMT-70............................................................................113
FIGURE 46: BACK PANEL CONNECTORS FOR AMT-73L .........................................................................113
FIGURE 47: TS-422/RS-449 TO RS-530 ADAPTER CABLE PIN-OUT ......................................................114
FIGURE 48: RS-422/RS-449 TO RS-530 Y-CABLE PIN-OUTS ...............................................................115
FIGURE 49: RS-530 DATA INTERFACE PIN-OUTS ...................................................................................116
FIGURE 50: HSSI DATA INTERFACE PIN-OUTS .......................................................................................117
FIGURE 51: ETHERNET RJ-45 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ...........................................................................117
FIGURE 52: RS-232 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ..........................................................................................118
11
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
FIGURE 53: RS-232 NULL MODEM CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ....................................................................118
FIGURE 54: RS-485 CONNECTORS PIN-OUTS ........................................................................................119
FIGURE 55: EIA/TIA-449 CONNECTOR PIN-OUTS ..................................................................................119
FIGURE 56: CABLE PIN-OUTS BETWEEN AMT-70 AND ADVANTECHAMT C & KU BAND ...........................121
FIGURE 57: PIN-OUTS FOR ALARM CONNECTOR .....................................................................................122
FIGURE 58: DB15-DB15-REDUNDANCY SWITCH ADAPTER CABLE PIN-OUTS .........................................123
FIGURE 59: ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO VALUES FOR AMT70 & 73.................................................127
FIGURE 60 : ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO VALUES FOR AMT75 .........................................................127
FIGURE 61 3RD PARTY ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO FOR AMT70.........................................................128
FIGURE 62 3RD PARTY ETPC CODE RATES AND EB/NO FOR AMT75.........................................................128
FIGURE 63: TEST DIAGRAM FOR SSPB AND LNB ..................................................................................130
FIGURE 64: REDUNDANCY CONNECTIONS: ASI INTERFACE AS DATA INPUT .............................................132
FIGURE 65: RS-530 / HSSI REDUNDANCY SYSTEM CONNECTION OVERVIEW ..........................................134
FIGURE 66: 1:1 REDUNDANCY SHELF CONNECTIONS REAR-VIEW. RS-530 AND BNC CONNECTIONS SHOWN
.....................................................................................................................................................135
FIGURE 67: 1:1 REDUNDANCY SHELF CONNECTIONS REAR-VIEW. HSSI AND BNC CONNECTIONS SHOWN135
FIGURE 68: 1-1 REDUNDANCY CONTROLLER (R5-530/HSSI ONLY) FRONT PANEL ..................................136
FIGURE 69: AMT-70/73 REDUNDANCY COMMANDS ...............................................................................137
FIGURE 70: REDUNDANCY FAULT MASK REGISTER ................................................................................138
FIGURE 71: TYPICAL AMT-70 CABLING INSTALLATION............................................................................141
FIGURE 72: INSTALLATION USING 70 MHZ INPUTS ..................................................................................141
FIGURE 73: POWER LOSS IN LMR-600 CABLE VERSUS CABLE LENGTH .................................................142
FIGURE 74: QSSK (S+N) CONVERSION CHART .....................................................................................149
FIGURE 75: 8PSK (S+N) CONVERSION CHART ......................................................................................150
FIGURE 76: 16QAM (S+N)/N CONVERSION CHART ...............................................................................151
FIGURE 77: EMBEDDED ROUTER SUPPORT ............................................................................................152
FIGURE 78: AMT-70/73L REAR PANEL EQUIPPED WITH AERO OPTION ..................................................152
FIGURE 79. AHPG SUPPORT ................................................................................................................155
FIGURE 80: SIMPLE POINT-TO-POINT CONFIGURATION OF TWO AMT-75 MODEMS....................................158
FIGURE 81: REAR PANEL .......................................................................................................................161
FIGURE 82: QPSK AT 96KBPS AT –100DBM / HZ ..................................................................................182
FIGURE 83: QPSK AT 256KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ............................................................183
FIGURE 84: QPSK 3MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...................................................................184
FIGURE 85: QPSK AT 10MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................185
FIGURE 86: QPSK AT 35MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................186
FIGURE 87: 8PSK AT 150KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................187
FIGURE 88: 8PSK AT 400KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................188
FIGURE 89: 8PSK AT 16MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..............................................................189
FIGURE 90: 8PSK AT 55MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..............................................................190
FIGURE 91: 16QAM AT 512KBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ..........................................................191
FIGURE 92: 16QAM AT 6MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER .............................................................192
FIGURE 93: 16QAM AT 20MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...........................................................193
FIGURE 94: 16QAM AT 70MBPS AT –104DBM/HZ INPUT POWER ...........................................................194
FIGURE 95: DVB-S2 THEORETICAL PERFORMANCE FIGURES ..................................................................195

12
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

TABLE OF DEFINITIONS
16QAM ............................................................................................16 Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
8PSK .........................................................................................................................8 Phase-shift Keying
AHPG ..........................................................................................Advantech High-Performance Gateway
ASI............................................................................................................. Asynchronous Serial Interface
BPSK................................................................................................................ Binary Phase-shift Keying
BDC....................................................................................................................... Block Down-Converter
BER ......................................................................................................................................Bit Error Rate
BUC............................................................................................................................ Block Up-Converter
C-Band ............................................................................ITU-defined frequency band (5.250-5.925GHz)
CRC................................................................................................................. Cyclic Redundancy Check
DCE......................................................................................................Data Communications Equipment
DTE ...................................................................................................................Data Terminal Equipment
DVB ................................................................................................................. Digital Video Broadcasting
eTPC ..................................................................................................... Enhanced Turbo Product Coding
ETSI ..........................................................................European Telecommunications Standards Institute
FCC .............................................................................................. Federal Communications Commission
FEC ....................................................................................................................Forward Error Correction
FTP.......................................................................................................................... File Transfer Protocol
HSSI .............................................................................................................. High-Speed Serial Interface
IEEE ............................................................................... Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IBS.................................................................................................Intelsat Business Services (IESS-309)
IDR .................................................................................................... Intermediate Data Rate (IESS-308)
IESS ......................................................................................................... Intelsat Earth Station Standard
IETF........................................................................................................ Internet Engineering Task Force
IF ..........................................................................................................................Intermediate Frequency
Ku-Band ............................................. ITU-defined frequency band (13.40-14.00GHz, 15.70-17.70GHz)
L-Band.......................... ITU-defined frequency band (1.215-1.400GHz, extended to 0.9500-2.150GHz)
LCD ......................................................................................................................... Liquid Crystal Display
LED ........................................................................................................................... Light Emitting Diode
LNA ............................................................................................................................Low-Noise Amplifier
LNB ................................................................................................... Low-Noise Block (Down) Converter
M&C ......................................................................................................................Management & Control
MIB ........................................................................................................... Management Information Base
MPEG........................................................................................................... Motion Picture Expert Group
QPSK ....................................................................................................... Quadrature Phase-shift Keying
OQPSK...........................................................................................Offset Quadrature Phase-shift Keying
PLO .................................................................................................................... Phase-Locked Oscillator
PTCM ............................................................................................... Pragmatic Trellis Coded Modulation
RF................................................................................................................................... Radio Frequency
RFC ..................................................................................... Request For Comment (an IETF “standard”)
RS ......................................................................................................................................Reed-Solomon
RSV ........................................................................................................................ Reed-Solomon-Viterbi
RU ................................................................................................................... Rack Unit (19”W x 1.75”H)
RX .................................................................................................................................................Receive
SNMP ........................................................................................... Simple Network Management Protocol
SCPC ............................................................................................................. Single Carrier Per Channel
SSPB....................................................................................................... Solid-State Block Up-Converter
TCP/IP............................................................................Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol
TPC ........................................................................................................................ Turbo Product Coding
TX.................................................................................................................................................Transmit

13
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

SAFETY NOTICE
FCC Warning
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate radio frequency energy, and, if not installed in
accordance with the instructions contained herein, may cause interference to radio communications.
It has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class A computing device pursuant to
Subpart J of Part 15 of the Federal Communications Commission rules, which are designed to
provide reasonable protection against such interference, when operating in a commercial
environment.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause interference. In this case, the user
is required to take whatever measures are necessary to correct the interference at the user’s
expense.
If radio frequency interference is encountered after the installation of this equipment, corrective
measures are required to reduce the interference. Information on recommended measures can be
obtained from the manufacturer.
English/German/French Warnings:

English Text (UL/CSA) German Text (VDE/TUV) French Text

WARNING WARNUNG AVERTISSEMENT

Only qualified technicians Der Zugang ins Innere des Seulement des spécialistes
should have access to this Gerätes ist nur einem fachlich qualifiés devrait avoir accès à cet
unit. qualifizierten Techniker gestattet. appareil.

1. To ensure adequate cooling 1. Um die Kühlung des Gerätes 1. Afin de ne pas nuire au
of the equipment, a 2.0-inch nicht zu beeinträchtigen, ist es processus de refroidissement, il
unobstructed space must be notwendig, an allen Seiten des est nécessaire de laisser un
provided around all sides of Gerätes ca. 5 cm Raum zu espace d’environ 5 cm de chaque
the unit. lassen. côté de l’appareil.

2. The AC Power Socket shall 2. Stellen Sie das Gerät in der 2. Placez l’appareil près d’une
be installed near the Nähe eines geerdeten prise de courant facilement
equipment and shall be easily Schutzkontaktsteckers so auf, accessible.
accessible. dass der Stecker leicht
erreichbar und zugänglich ist.
3. Remove power plug from 3. Vorm Öffnen des Gerätes 3. Débranchez l’appareil avant de
the power socket before muss der Netzstecker vom l’ouvrir.
performing any service work Stromnetz getrennt werden!
on the unit!

Caution
Only factory authorized service personnel should perform Service on this unit. Failure to observe
this warning can result in malfunction to the unit as well as electrocution to personnel.

Avertissement
Cet appareil ne peut être examiné ou réparé que par un employé autorisé du fabricant. Si cette
consigne n’est pas respectée, il y a risque de panne et/ou d’électrocution.

Vorsich
Dieses Gerät darf nur durch das bevollmächtigte Kundendienstpersonal der Fabrik instandgehalten
werden. Die Nichtbeachtung dieser Vorschrift kann zu Fehlfunktionen des Gerätes führen und das
Personal durch Stromschläge gefährden.

14
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

WARRANTY AND SERVICE

AdvantechAMT warrants to the Purchaser that the Products and any Repaired Products (Repairs)
will be free from defects in material and workmanship for a period of two years from the date of
shipment to the Purchaser.
AdvantechAMT‘s obligation under this warranty is limited to replacing or repairing, at
AdvantechAMT's option, Products or Repairs found by AdvantechAMT to be defective within the
warranty period. All such replacements and repairs shall be performed at facilities designated by
AdvantechAMT and shall be performed only after the customer has received a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number from AdvantechAMT and has returned the Product to AdvantechAMT,
shipping and insurance prepaid by Purchaser.
The returned Product must be accompanied by the customer's name, address and telephone
number, the model and serial number of the Product, a statement of the purchase date and a
detailed description of the problem. Products and Repairs returned by Purchaser shall be repaired
by AdvantechAMT using new or refurbished parts and shall be returned to Purchaser by
AdvantechAMT, shipping prepaid by AdvantechAMT.
This warranty shall immediately become null and void if, in AdvantechAMT's sole judgment, the
Product has been subject to unauthorized modification, misuse, abuse, neglect, accident, improper
installation or application, alteration or neglect in use, storage, transportation or handling, or if the
serial number and/or other Product markings have been removed, defaced or altered.
AdvantechAMT may, at its discretion, perform out-of-warranty repairs at AdvantechAMT facilities in
exchange of customary charges, or offer a written agreement extending the terms of this warranty at
a price stated in such agreement. All repairs performed out of warranty or pursuant to an extended
warranty agreement shall be subject to all of the applicable limitations and procedures of this
Agreement.
The above warranties are in lieu of all other warranties, expressed, implied, or statutory or arising by
custom of trade usage, including any warranty of merchantability of fitness for any unique, special or
express purpose, and of all other obligations of liabilities whether in contract, tort or otherwise
including, without limitation, liability for damages (whether general or special, direct or indirect,
consequential, incidental, exemplary) or any claim for the loss of profits or business or for damage
to goodwill.

15
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

EXTENDED WARRANTY OPTIONS

Please contact Customer Service or your reseller for information on optional extended warranties.
SERVICE
Support functions provided by AdvantechAMT's Customer Service include complete factory repair
for both in-warranty and out-of-warranty equipment.
In the U.S.A., call AdvantechAMT at 1-(480)-784-4646 for Customer Support. In Canada, you can
call at 1-(514)-420-0045 and in Europe, contact at 44-(1480)-357-600. In all other countries,
contact your local AdvantechAMT distributor or reseller.
A Customer Service engineer will answer warranty-related questions, discuss your specific
equipment problems, and when necessary, give you shipping instructions for returning equipment to
AdvantechAMT for repair.
To return a Product for service or repair, you must obtain a RMA number from AdvantechAMT's
Customer Service.

The following information is required:

Customer name, address, telephone number
Model number
Serial number
Detailed description of problem
All customer-returned units must be shipped to AdvantechAMT freight prepaid, in the original carton
or equivalent. AdvantechAMT is not responsible for damage in transit.
All repairs will require return of the entire equipment to AdvantechAMT. No individual modules will
be accepted for repair under this contract.

16
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-70)

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
MODULATOR
Data Rate 16 Kbps to 140 Mbps
Data Rate Options 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps
Symbol Rate 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol
Data Interfaces RS 530 / V35 (standard)
ASI (optional)
Single HSSI interface(standard)
Triple HSSI (optional)
Ethernet 10/100BaseT (optional)
Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional)
G.703 (optional)
1 to 8 X E1/T1 (optional)
Local / Remote Monitor & Control Interfaces 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interface
9 pin /d-sub (F) for RS-485 Serial interface (Terminal mode and packet
protocol mode)
15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact)
RJ-45 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Data Connector 25 pin, D-sub (F), standard for RS530 Data interface
BNC (F) - 75 Ω for ASI and E3/T3 G.703 interfaces
50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data
RJ-45 for Ethernet options and for balanced bi-directional E1/T1 interface
with Octal E1/T1 card
Data Clock Source Modulator will be defined as Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
Modulation Type & FEC Rate Continuous Wave (CW)
BPSK:
Note: Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi
Refer to 9.2.3 DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional
for Turbo Code Rates. eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5,7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional
QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5,3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional

16QAM:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code
eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional
Modulation Roll-Off Factor 12% to 35% with 1% resolution

17
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Configurable Forward Error Correction Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 convolutional encoding K=7.
Optional: Reed Solomon outer (based on DVB-S/ DVB-DSNG standards)
with convolutional inner coding or
Enhanced Turbo code rate range: between 0.448 and 0.914
(see 9.1 for details).
Intelsat FEC rates from 16kbps to 60 Mbps (8PSK)
DVB compliant rates from 64kbps to 110 Mbps
Turbo data rates from 64kbps to 140 Mbps
RF Output Connector N-type, (F) for L-Band
Optional: CPR137 contact
Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥10 dB
RF Output Frequency L-Band: 950 to 1750 MHz, option to 2000MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps
Optional C-Band: 5.850 to 6.425 GHz, variable in 100 Hz steps
RF Output Power Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments
Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB
Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB
Equipment Reference Frequency & Phase Reference Frequency: 10 MHz
Noise External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB
Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources)

BUC Supply 24V or 48V DC (Optional)

DEMODULATOR
Data Rate 16 Kbps to 140 Mbps, variable
Data Rate Options 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps
Symbol Rate 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol
Data Scrambling Polynomial Intelsat V.35 or Intelsat Synchronous or DVB Compliant
Demodulator Type & FEC Rate BPSK:
Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code
Note: eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20
Refer to 9.2.3
for Turbo Code Rates. QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional

16QAM:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional
eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, Optional
IF Input (Option) 2 x BNC, (F) for 70 MHz / 140 MHz
Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥10 dB
RF Input (See A.2.7 for Input Power versus 2 x F-type, (F) for 950MHz to 2150MHz
Symbol Rate) Impedance: 75 Ω
Return Loss: ≥9 dB
Input Level: 10Log (Symbol Rate) -100 dBm, +12 dB
Maximum Composite Input Power: -20dBm

18
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Typical L-Band Phase Noise (at 2GHz) -60 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz
-70 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz
-80 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz
-90 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz
-98 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz
BER Performance and Channel Spacing Refer to
Figure 6 for Viterbi and Viterbi with Reed Solomon FEC.
Refer to Chapter 9 for eTPC FEC.
LNB Supply Voltage 13V or 18V switchable
450 mA maximum
LNB Signals 22 kHz switching tone available
10 MHz reference output (nominal 0.5V p-p)
DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES
Monitoring & Control (M&C) Front Panel: as standard
External M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T, RS-232, RS-485, SNMP (future
option)
Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM
Data Interfaces RS 530 / V35 (standard)
ASI (optional)
Single HSSI interface (standard)
Triple HSSI interface (optional)
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (optional)
Dual Ethernet 10/100 Base-T + Single HSSI (optional)
G.703 (optional)
Nx T1/E1(optional)
Receiver ASI Interface Encoded Line Rate: 270 MSymbol ± 100 ppm
Min Sensitivity (D21.5 idle pattern): 200 mV
Max Input Voltage: 880 mV p-p
Discrete Connector Return Loss: ≥15 dB
Max. Distance: 150 m
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Dimensions The AMT-70 is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis.
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75")
Width: 43.2 cm (17") without ears and 48.26cm (19”) with ears
Depth: 40.6 cm (16")
Weight: 11 lb (5 kg) maximum
Power AC (DC Optional) AC: Auto sensing 95-265 VAC, 50/60 Hz
DC: 48 VDC (+32 to +72 VDC)
Typical Power Dissipation:
45 W without LNB/BUC power supply
60 W when powering LNB/BDC
150 W when powering BUC and LNB/BDC
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 122°F)
o o o o
Storage Temperature: -25 C to 85 C (-13 F to 185 F)
Relative Humidity: up to 90% non-condensing, operating; up to 95% non-
condensing, storage
Altitude: Up to 10,000 ft (3,045 m) operating; to 40,000 ft
(12,180 m) during transit

19
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L)

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
MODULATOR
Data Rate (mandatory)
BPSK 64 Kbps to 8472 kbps
QPSK/OQPSK 64 kbps to 20,000 kbps
8PSK/TCM 1,544 kbps to 51,840 kbps
8PSK/16QAM Up to 52 Mbps using eTPC and HSSI interface

Up to 110Mbps in optional 16QAM Turbo mode

Data Rate Options available 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps
Symbol Rate 32 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol
Data and Clock Interfaces EIA/TIA 449 with MIL-STD-188-114
Single HSSI interface
10/100 Base-T Ethernet data interface (optional)
Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional)
Data Connectors 37 pin, D-sub (F), standard for EIA/TIA 449 Data interface
25 pin, D-sub (F), optional for RS530 Data interface
50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data
RJ-45 for Ethernet option(s)
Data Clock Source Internal or External (internal clock to be extracted from data, with up to 50
consecutive 1s or 0s, which occurs no more than once in 10 kbits, and data is
within 100 ppm)
Data and Clock Timing Jitter, Input Max of 10% of bit period
Demand Clock
-7
Accuracy 1 x 10 Stability 1 hr after warm-up
-8
1 x 10 Stability/day (accuracy shall conform to external reference w/o warm-up)
Distortion Per EIA-334, or 5 nanoseconds, whichever is greater
Data Scrambling Modes No Scrambling
IESS-308; IESS-309; IESS-310
OM-73(V)/G (BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK)
Differential Encoding Modes Off; per IESS-308/309/310; special per MIL-STD-188-165A for BPSK/OQPSK
Local / Remote Monitor & Control Interfaces 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interfaces
15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact)
Modulation Type & FEC Rate Continuous Wave (CW)
BPSK:
Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5 ,3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)

QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer
Code (QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, (refer to Chapter 9)

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5,3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20, (refer to Chapter 9)

16QAM, Optional:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code
eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
Modulation Roll-Off Factor 23% Alpha Raised Cosine Filter to MIL-188-165A standard
Modulation Timing Jitter < 3% peak of modulation symbol period
o
Modulation Phase Error <2

20
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Configurable Forward Error Correction Rate 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6 and 7/8 convolutional encoding K=7.
Optional: Reed Solomon outer (based on DVB-S/DVB-DSNG standards)
with convolutional inner coding or
Enhanced Turbo code rate range: between 0.448 and 0.914 (see Chapter 9).
Intelsat FEC rates from 16kbps to 52 Mbps (8PSK)
DVB compliant rates from 64kbps to 110 Mbps
Turbo data rates from 64 kbps to 140 Mbps
RF Output Connector TNC (f) Connector, labeled as J1
Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥14 dB, 950-1750 MHz; ≥10 dB, 1000-2000 MHz
RF Output Frequency L-Band: 950 to 2000 MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps
-8
Stability: 1 x 10 per day
-7 -7
Frequency Stability: 1 x 10 after 1 hr warm-up internal; 1 x 10 w/o warm-up,
external
Group Delay Variation Per MIL-STD 188-165A requirements
Spectral Inversion No Inversion. Modulation spectral inversion is programmable.
o
Phase Noise Integrated Single sideband from 10 Hz to 100 MHz: 2.8 RMS
Max Output Phase Noise (by offset):
-42 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz
-72 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz
-82 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz
-92 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz
-102 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz
-112 dBc/Hz at 1 MHz
-122 dBc/Hz at 10 to 100 MHz
o
Phase Perturbation Linear phase: <20 in 0.2 seconds under following conditions:
o
Temperature: Rate of change shall be 22 /Hr
Vibration: Between 50-2,000 Hz with constant input acceleration of 1.5 gf/Hr.
Shock: Impact of test hammer of 1 lb. attached to 8” arm through vertical plane;
striking face covered with ½” open cell sponge rubber with the following:
Density: 0.027 lbs/cubic inch
Compression Deflection: 7-14 lb/sq in for 25% deflection
o
Swing: Free swing through 90 arc – impact enclosure at bottom of swing
RF Output Power Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments, monotonic transitions
w/o burst errors
Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB
Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB
Off Condition: -60 dBm in any 3 MHz B/W from 0-4000 MHz
RF Output Spurious -51 dBc > 64 kbps; -46 dBc ≤ 64 kbps (optional)
th
RF Output Harmonics ≥ -60 dBc up to 12 harmonic or 4 GHz, whichever is greater
-5
Modulator to Demodulator Isolation Contribution < 0.2 dB @10 BER over any Tx freq/pwr level from Tx off
Equipment Reference Frequency Reference Frequency: 10 MHz
& Phase Noise, Internal External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB
Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources)
Max External Reference Phase Noise (by offset):
-115 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz
-135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz
-148 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz
-150 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz
-160 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz
DEMODULATOR
RF Input Connector Connector: TNC (f), labeled as J2
Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥14 dB, 950-1750 MHz; ≥10 dB, 1000-2000 MHz
RF Input 950 MHz to 2000 MHz (min) / 100 Hz step size
RF Noise Figure 9 dB typical; 12 dB at maximum AGC gain
RF Frequency Uncertainty, Min. +30 kHz including Doppler offset

21
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
RF Input Power (See BER shall not change with the following:
Desired Carrier: -45 dBm - 10log (40000/R) dBm
(where R = Symbol Rate in kSymbols)
for Input Power versus Symbol Rate) AGC Range: +20 dB
Max. Composite Input Power: Sum of all carriers ≤ +20 dBm; within 10 MHz
≤30 dBc; ≤+40 dBc
Input Overload: No damage by continuous IF input of ≤25 dBm
o
Receive Phase Perturbation Linear phase: <20 in 0.2 seconds under following conditions:
o
Temperature: Rate of change shall be 22 /Hr
Vibration: Between 50-2,000 Hz with constant input acceleration of 1.5 gf/Hr.
Shock: Impact of test hammer of 1 lb. attached to 8” arm through vertical plane;
striking face covered with ½” open cell sponge rubber with the following:
Density: 0.027 lbs/cubic inch
Compression Deflection: 7-14 lb/sq in for 25% deflection
o
Swing: Free swing through 90 arc – impact enclosure at bottom of swing
Data Rate (mandatory)
BPSK 64 Kbps to 8472 kbps
QPSK/OQPSK 64 kbps to 20,000 kbps
8PSK/TCM 1,544 kbps to 51,840 kbps
8PSK/16QAM Up to 52 Mbps using eTPC and HSSI interface

Up to 110Mbps in optional 16QAM Turbo mode

Data Rate Options 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps
Symbol Rate 32 KSymbol to 30 MSymbol
Acquisition Range
-3
Acquisition Time (BER of 10 Viterbi with +30 Data Rate Max. Initial Acquisition Max. Reacquisition
kHz frequency uncertainty) ≥16 kbps < 50 seconds < 30 seconds
≥ 64 kbps < 25 seconds < 15 seconds
≥ 128 kbps < 15 seconds < 10 seconds
≥ 1.544 Mbps < 1.5 seconds < 1 second
-3
Timing (10 BER Viterbi) Bit Count Integrity (BCI): No false additions/deletions in 7 days with up to 50
consecutive 1’s or 0’s without data scrambling.
Synchronization Retention: Per MIL-STD-188-165A
Timing Jitter: ≤ +5% with modulated jitter ≤ 3%
Doppler (Min. Requirements) Doppler Parameter L Band
Shift in Hz +1,200
Rate of Change (Hz/sec) +110
2
Acceleration (Hz/sec ) +120
BER Performance (with scrambler/differential ½ QPSK ¾ QPSK 7/8 QPSK 2/3 TCM 8PSK Uncoded
encoder enabled), in dB Viterbi Viterbi Viterbi Viterbi (No FEC)
Viterbi BER
-3
10 4.0 5.5 6.5 6.6 8.5
-5
10 5.5 6.9 7.8 8.0 10.9
-6
10 6.1 7.5 8.5 9.6 11.9
-7
10 6.7 8.1 9.1 10.4 12.8
Viterbi w / RS
-5
10 4.4 5.7 6.6 6.5
-6
10 4.5 5.8 6.8 6.8
-7
10 4.6 6.1 6.9 7.0
eTPC (Optional)
BER Degradation with Adjacent Channel Carriers Two like carriers each 10 dB above wanted carrier (range dependant on Es/No)
(subtract from Eb/No values, above) Symmetrical (channel Spacing) Asymmetrical (channel spacing)
1.2 x Data Rate 1.4 x Data rate 1.2 x Data Rate 1.4 x Data rate
≤ 0.36 to 0.99 dB ≤ 0.41 to 1.21 dB ≤ 0.38 to 1.01 dB ≤ 0.43 to 1.23 dB
-5
Demodulator-to-Demodulator Isolation < 0.2 dB with Eb/No @ BER = 10

22
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Demodulator Type & FEC Rate BPSK:
Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional

QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5, 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional

16QAM:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional
eTPC Rate 3/4, 4/5, 7/8, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9), Optional
Data Descrambling Modes None
IESS-308; IESS-309; IESS-310
OM-73(V)/G (BPSK, QPSK and OQPSK)
Differential Decoding Modes Off; per IESS-308/309/310; special per MIL-STD-188-165A for BPSK/OQPSK
DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES
Data Interfaces EIA/TIA-449 / MIL-STD-188-114; DB-37(f) connector; labeled J8
Single HSSI interface; 50 pin (f) HSSI connector, labeled J18
Optional RS530 connector and 10/100 Base-T Ethernet
Monitoring & Control (M&C) Active Front Panel: as standard
M&C Asynchronous Serial Interfaces: RS-232 terminal mode, 9-pin D (f); RS-
485 packet mode, 9-pin D (f)
Ethernet M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T for SNMP, Telnet or HTTP
Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM
M&C Control Response Times ≤ 0.25 seconds
Monitor and Control Functions (Min) Control Monitoring
Data Rate (Tx/Rx) Data Rate (Tx/Rx)
Modulation Type (Tx/Rx) Modulation Type (Tx/Rx)
Differential Coding (Tx/Rx) Differential Coding (Tx/Rx)
Scrambling (Tx/Rx) Scrambling (Tx/Rx)
FEC Coding, Inner/Outer (Tx/Rx) FEC Coding, Inner/Outer (Tx/Rx)
R/S Interleaver Depth (Tx Rx) R/S Interleaver Depth (Tx Rx)
IF Carrier Frequency (Tx/Rx) IF Carrier Frequency (Tx/Rx)
Transmit IF Power On/Off Transmit IF Power On/Off
Transmit IF Power Level Transmit IF Power Level
Frequency Reference Source Fault Status
Stored Faults
Received Eb/No
Acquisition Indicator
Rcv. Signal Power Level
Bit Synchronization Indicator
(Tx/Rx)
Eb/No Automatic Reporting and Accuracy Interval: ≤ 1 second
Accuracy: 0.35 dB over the range from -3 to -20 dB Eb/No

23
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
5 MHz Reference (IAW MIL-STD-188-115), Input Reference Frequency: 5 MHz
Connector: BNC female, labeled J14
External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB
Max External Reference Phase Noise (to meet Tx/Rx Phase Noise):
-115 dBc/Hz at 10 Hz
-135 dBc/Hz at 100 Hz
-148 dBc/Hz at 1 kHz
-150 dBc/Hz at 10 kHz
-160 dBc/Hz at 100 kHz
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Dimensions The AMT-73L is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis.
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75")
Width: 43.2 cm (17")
Depth: 52 cm (20.56")
Weight: 12 lb maximum
Power AC AC: Auto-sensing 90-264 VAC, 47-63 Hz
Typical Power Dissipation: 58 Watts typical
Connector: IEC 320 with retention cap.
Power Cord: 6 ft. with NEMA 5-15P connector
Modem to operate without interruption/degradation of performance during
switchover in power from a 120 VAC 60 Hz to a 220 VAC 50 Hz source with a
loss in power less than 20 ms.
Chassis Ground 10-32 stud
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 56°C
o o
Storage Temperature: -40 C to 71 C
Relative Humidity, Operating: 5-95% non-condensing
Relative Humidity, Non-Operating: 5-100%
Altitude, Operational: Up to 10,000 ft. referenced to sea level
Altitude, Non-Operational: -120 to 40,000 ft. during transit
Shock, Non-Operational: Withstand 2.3 G’s sinusoidal shock, any axis, with
20.0 millisecond duration
Transportation Vibration: Power Spectral Densities to be met in 3 axis
Electromagnetic Emissions (measured at 1 25 – 70 dBu Volts/Meter from 2 to 20 GHz with 10 kHz to 1 MHz BW, a dwell
Meter) time of 0.015, and a measurement time of 1.5 sec/MHz to 15.0 sec/GHz

24
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-75)

The specifications listed for the Modulator are just for the DVB-S2 option. The
modulator can also support all of the AMT70 options listed in the AMT70 technical
specification.

DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
MODULATOR
Data Rate 64 Kbps to 140 Mbps
Data Rate Options 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 140Mbps
Symbol Rate 128 KSymbol to 40 MSymbol
Data Interfaces RS 530 / V35 (standard)
ASI (optional)
Single HSSI interface(standard)
Triple HSSI (optional)
Ethernet 10/100BaseT (optional)
Dual Ethernet 10/100BaseT + Single HSSI (optional)
G.703 (optional)
1 to 8 X E1/T1 (optional)
Local / Remote Monitor & 9 pin D-sub (F) for RS-232 Serial interface
Control Interfaces 9 pin /d-sub (F) for RS-485 Serial interface (Terminal mode and packet protocol mode)
15 pin D-sub (F) for Alarm interface (switch-over contact)
RJ-45 10/100BaseT Ethernet
Data Connector 25 pin, D-sub (F), standard for RS530 Data interface
BNC (F) - 75 Ω for ASI and E3/T3 G.703 interfaces
50 pin SCSI-2 connector (F) for HSSI Data
RJ-45 for Ethernet option and for balanced bi-directional E1/T1 interface with Octal
E1/T1 card
Data Clock Source Modulator will be defined as Data Communications Equipment (DCE)
DVB-S2 Modulation Type & Continuous Wave (CW)
FEC Rate
QPSK:
64Kbps to 70Mbps
DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block
1 2 1 3 2 4 5 8
SHORT Block 16kbit ¼, /3, /5, /2, /5, /3, /5, /6, /9
1 2 1 3 2 4 5 8 9
NORMAL Block 64kbit ¼, /3, /5, /2, /5, /3, /5, /6, /9, /10
8PSK:
256kbps to 110Mbps
DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block
3 2 3 5 8
SHORT Block 16kbit /5, /3, /4, /6, /9
3 2 3 5 8 9
NORMAL Block 64kbit /5, /3, /4, /6, /9, /10

16APSK:
340kbps to 140Mbps
DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block
2 3 4 5 8
SHORT Block 16kbit /3, /4, /5, /6, /9
2 3 4 5 8 9
NORMAL Block 64kbit /3, /4, /5, /6, /9, /10

32APSK:
470kbps to 175Mbps
DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block
3 4 5 8
SHORT Block 16kbit /4, /5, /6, /9
3 4 5 8 9
NORMAL Block 64kbit /4, /5, /6, /9, /10

25
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Modulation Type & FEC Rate
BPSK:
Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ¾, 7/8

QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer Code
(QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ¾, 7/8

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ¾, 7/8

16QAM, Optional:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code
eTPC Rate 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ¾, 7/8

Modulation Roll-Off Factor 12% to 35% with 1% resolution

Configurable Forward Error Intelsat 308/309
Correction DVB-S/DVB-DSNG Coding
ETPC (as AMT70)
DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL FEC Block
* 1 * 2 * 1 * 3 2 4 5 7 8
SHORT Block 16kbit ¼ , /3 , /5 , /2 , /5, /3, /5, /6, /8, /9
* 1 * 2 * 1 * 3 2 4 5 7 8 9
NORMAL Block 64kbit ¼ , /3 , /5 , /2 , /5, /3, /5, /6, /8, /9, /10
* Only available in QPSK according to DVB-S2 Specification
RF Output Connector N-type, (F) for L-Band
BNC (F) for 70 and 140MHz output
Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥10 dB
RF Output Frequency L-Band: 950 to 1750 MHz, option to 2000MHz, variable in 100 Hz steps
IF Band: 70 +/-18 MHz or 950-2000MHz
140 +/-36 MHz or 950-2000MHz

RF Output Power Range: 0 to -25 dBm, adjustable in 0.10 dB increments

Accuracy: ± 0.5 dB
Temp Stability: ± 0.25 dB
Equipment Reference Reference Frequency: 10 MHz
Frequency & Phase Noise External Ref Level: 0 dBm ± 2 dB
Internal Freq Stability: Stratum-1 (0.15 ppm due to all sources)

BUC Supply 24V or 48V DC (Optional)

DEMODULATOR
Data Rate 16 Kbps to 150 Mbps, variable
Data Rate Options 16kbps to 10Mbps, 20Mbps, 52Mbps and 150Mbps
Symbol Rate 128 KSymbol to 45 MSymbol
Data Scrambling Polynomial Intelsat V.35 or Intelsat Synchronous or DVB Compliant

26
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
DVB-S2 Demodulator Type & BPSK:
FEC Rate Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188) Outer Code
Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade

QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
DVB-S2 supported as Modulator (see Modulator box for details)
Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code, Optional
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
DVB-S2 supported as Modulator
Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade

16QAM:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code, Optional
Turbo not available at launch will be a future Upgrade

16APSK:
DVB-S2 supported as Modulator

32APSK:
DVB-S2 supported as Modulator

27
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
Modulation Type & FEC Rate
BPSK:
Intelsat 1/2,3/4,7/8 Viterbi
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 Viterbi with RS (204,188) Outer Code, Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20
AMT75 ONLY
TPC Code Block Size Maximum bit rate Mb/s
AMT70 3/5 16K 12
AMT70 4/5 4K 14
AMT70 8/9 16K 22
AMT70 19/20 16K 26
rd
3 Party 1/2 10
rd
3 Party 3/4 4K 13
rd
3 Party 7/8 16k 29
rd
3 Party 19/20 24

QPSK / OQPSK:
Intelsat 1/2, 3/4, 7/8
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) for data rates ≥ 512 kbps or RS (126,112) Outer Code
(QPSK only) for data rates ≤ 512 kbps
DVB 1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8 with RS (204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20

8PSK:
Intelsat IESS-310 2/3 PTCM Inner code
Selectable Intelsat (219,201) or RS (126,112) Outer Code
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 2/3, 5/6, 8/9 with RS(204,188), Optional
eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20

16QAM, Optional:
DVB-DSNG PTCM Rate 3/4, 7/8 with RS(204,188) code
eTPC Rate 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20 (refer to Chapter 9)
rd
3 party TPC ½, ¾, 7/8, 19/20

IF Input (Option) 2 x BNC, (F) for 70 MHz / 140 MHz

Impedance: 50 Ω
Return Loss: ≥10 dB
RF Input (See A.2.7 for Input 2 x F-type, (F) for 950MHz to 2150MHz
Power versus Symbol Rate) Impedance: 75 Ω
Return Loss: ≥9 dB
Input Level: 10Log (Symbol Rate) -100 dBm, +12 dB
Maximum Composite Input Power: -20dBm
BER Performance and Refer to
Channel Spacing Figure 6 for Viterbi and Viterbi with Reed Solomon FEC.
Refer to Chapter 18 for DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance
Refer to Chapter 9 for eTPC FEC.
Typical Eb/No Performance QPSK 8PSK 16QAM/16APSK 32APSK
against theory <0.5dBmargin N/A N/A N/A
DVB-S <0.5dB margin
<0.5dB margin <0.7dBmargin <1.0 margin N/A
DVB-DSNG <0.7dB margin
<1.0 margin <1.5 margin
DVB-S2
LNB Supply Voltage 13V or 18V switchable
450 mA maximum
LNB Signals 22 kHz switching tone available
10 MHz reference output (nominal 0.5V p-p)

28
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
DESCRIPTION SPECIFICATION
DATA & MANAGEMENT INTERFACES
Monitoring & Control (M&C) Front Panel: as standard
External M&C Interface: 10/100Base-T, RS-232, RS-485, SNMP (future option)
Configuration Parameter Storage: NVRAM
Data Interfaces RS 530 / V35 (standard)
ASI (optional)
Single HSSI interface (standard)
Triple HSSI interface (optional)
Ethernet 10/100 Base-T (optional)
Dual Ethernet + Single HSSI interface (optional)
G.703 (optional)
Nx T1/E1(optional)
Receiver ASI Interface Encoded Line Rate: 270 MSymbol ± 100 ppm
Min Sensitivity (D21.5 idle pattern): 200 mV
Max Input Voltage: 880 mV p-p
Discrete Connector Return Loss: ≥15 dB
Max. Distance: 150 m
PHYSICAL SPECIFICATIONS
Physical Dimensions The AMT-70 is a rack-mountable 1RU EIA chassis.
Height: 4.4 cm (1.75")
Width: 43.2 cm (17") without ears and 48.26cm (19”) with ears
Depth: 40.6 cm (16")
Weight: 11 lb (5 kg) maximum
Power AC (DC Optional) AC: Auto sensing 95-265 VAC, 50/60 Hz
DC: 48 VDC (+32 to +72 VDC)
Typical Power Dissipation:
50 W without LNB/BUC power supply
65 W when powering LNB/BDC
150 W when powering BUC and LNB/BDC
Environmental Operating Temperature: 0°C to 45°C (32°F to 122°F)
o o o o
Storage Temperature: -25 C to 85 C (-13 F to 185 F)
Relative Humidity: up to 90% non-condensing, operating; up to 95% non-condensing,
storage
Altitude: Up to 10,000 ft (3,045 m) operating; to 40,000 ft
(12,180 m) during transit

29
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

STANDARDS COMPLIANCE
Telecommunication Interface Standards

The AMT-70 modem is compliant to the following interface standards;

IEEE RS-422 / RS-449 / RS-530 and CCITT/ITU V.35 interface standards
ITU G.703: Physical Electrical Characteristics of Hierarchical Digital Interface.
10/100Base-T Ethernet: IEEE Standard for Information technology--Telecommunications
and information exchange between systems--Local and metropolitan area networks--
Specific requirements--Part 3: Carrier Sense Multiple Access with Collision Detection
(CSMA/CD) Access Method and Physical Layer Specifications
HSSI Design Specification, written by John T. Chapman and Mitri Halabi, Revision 2.11,
dated March 16, 1990 and Addendum Issue #1, dated January 23, 1991.
DVB-DSNG: ETSI Standards EN310 210 v1.1.1 Digital Video Broadcasting (DVB); Framing
structure, channel coding and modulation for Digital Satellite News Gathering (DSNG) and
other contribution applications by satellite
Intelsat Earth Station Standards (IESS) Documents (IESS 308/309/310/315): “Performance
Characteristics for Intermediate Data Rate Digital Carriers using Convolutional Encoder /
Viterbi Decoding and QPSK, 8PSK modulations.”
In addition, the AMT-73 shall be compliant to the following documents:
Military Specifications
MIL-P-116 Preservation, Methods
MIL-P-53022B Primer, Epoxy Coating, Corrosion Inhibiting, Lead and Chromate
Free
MIL-E-17555 Electronic and Electrical Equipment, Accessories and Provisioned
Items (Repair Parts)
Military Standards
MIL-STD-129 Standard Practice for Military Marking
MIL-STD-130K Identification Marking of U.S. Military Property
MIL-STD 188-114 Electrical Characteristics of Digital Interface Circuits
MIL-STD-165A Interoperability of SHF Satellite Communications PSK Modems
(FDMA Operation)
MIL-STD- 810F Environmental Engineering Considerations and Laboratory Tests
MIL-STD-889 Dissimilar Metals
MIL-STD-2073-1 Preservation, Methods
Other
MIL-HDBK-454 General Requirements for Electronic Equipment

30
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
Non-Government Documents

NEC National Electric Code; by the National Fire Protection Code

(NFPA)
FED-STD-595 Federal Colors Standard 595
EIA/TIA-449 General Purpose 37-Pin and 9-Pin Interface for Data Terminal
Equipment and Data Circuit-Terminating Equipment Employing
Serial Binary Data Interchange

31
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION

The AMT-70 modem supports all the major satellite standards, both Intelsat and DVB, in a one rack
unit chassis, if the appropriate options are enabled. The modem can also be ordered with a Turbo
Product Code and DVB-S2 FEC options. The modem is available in both 70MHz, 140 MHz and L-
Band versions. This versatile unit can be used as a standalone satellite modem, a standalone DVB
Modulator as a universal test source for satellite demodulator testing, or for monitoring applications.
This modem supports most of the synchronous voice / data / video multiplexer interfaces on the
market for interconnectivity to backbone networks.
The AMT-70 modem family now includes inbuilt Network Management functions for local and
remote management via 10/100 Base-T Ethernet offering Telnet and SNMP management, RS-232
or RS-485. Front Panel control is also available.

1.1 The AMT-7X Family

The AMT-70 modem is a member of the AMT-7x family. These modems are available in many
configurations:

Model Description
AMT-70 High-speed modem with one modulator and one demodulator.
Interfaces include, RS-530 to 10Mbps and HSSI to 52Mbps and
optionally Ethernet router (10/100 Base-T) to 20 Mbps and ASI or Triple
HSSI to 140Mbps.

AMT-70 High-speed modem with one modulator and one demodulator.

Interfaces include up to 8xE1/T1, 10/100 Base-, RS530, 2xFXS
(Octal T1/E1)) connections and an overhead channel.

AMT-70 Dual 10/100 base-T full duplex Ethernet ports with additional RS530
serial interface. Allows Ethernet traffic up to 90Mbps and the IP traffic
(Fast Ethernet) can be bridged or statically or dynamically routed in the Modem.

AMT-70 Dual 10/100 base-T full duplex Ethernet ports with additional HSSI
interface. Allows Ethernet traffic up to 67Mbps and the IP traffic can be
(High-Performance bridged, statically or dynamically routed in the Modem.
IP router)

AMT-73L Very high-speed modem that meets or exceeds MIL-STD 188-165A

requirements. Operates in L band Transmit and L band Receive.
(Meets Interfaces includes EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-165A and HSSI to 52
MIL STD 188-65A) Mbps.

AMT-70 Very high-speed modulator. Interfaces include RS-530 to 10Mbps and

HSSI to 52 Mbps and optionally Ethernet (10/100 Base-T) to 90 Mbps
(TX Only) and ASI or Triple HSSI to 140Mbps. DVB-S / DVB-DSNG / Turbo /
Intelsat modulation

AMT-75 DVB-S2 Broadcast Modem including all the features of the AMT-70 but
with DVB-S2 and with ASI interface. Available as a Modem or Modulator

32
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

only or Demodulator Card. Can be ordered with any of the AMT70

series Interface cards.

AMT-75R Single or Dual DVB-S2 receiver with associated ASI, Ethernet or HSSI
outputs.

SBR-70 / SBR75 Single Board Demodulator Card. The SBR70 supports Intelsat, Turbo,
DVB-S and DVB-DSNG and the SBR-75 supports DVB-S2.

Figure 1: The AMT-7x Family

1+1 redundancy is available today on a wide variety of data interfaces. N+1 will be available in 2006.

1.2 Product Overview

1.2.1 AMT-70/75 Description

The AMT-70 product has one modulator and demodulator. A modulator-only product is available,
typically for broadcasting video or IP data applications. The demodulator can be sold separately as
a standalone card or in single or Dual AMT75 receive only 19inch rack mount units.

The modem can also equipped with an internal router. For modems supplied with internal routers,
see also Appendix C 1.

The typical features of the modems include:

L-Band output of 950-1750 MHz, optional to 2000 MHz;

L-Band input of 950-2150 MHz tunable in 1 Hz steps
Optional IF interface: 70+/-18 MHz or 140+/-36 MHz
Provision of DC power and reference for Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB) / Block
Down Converter (BDC) and Block Up Converter (BUC)
FEC: RSV (both Intelsat and DVB-S/DSNG), eTPC and DVB-S2(AMT75)
BPSK/QPSK/8PSK/16QAM/OQPSK/16APSK/32APSK modulation
FFT Technology for reliable acquisition
Occupies 1 Rack Unit (RU) of Rack Space (1.75”)
Power Consumption less than 60 W (not including BUC power supply)
Full Monitor and Control Capability using a VT100 type (RS-232) terminal, Telnet, FTP,
SNMP (10/100 Base-T Ethernet), and command mode (RS-485).
Optional 48 VDC input power
Optional BUC power supply voltages and currents
ASI (Digital Video), RS-530, 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, Telecomm E1/T1 and HSSI data
interfaces supported
AMT75 series includes DVB-S2 and LDPC coding both Short(16k) and Normal(64k) blocks

On the back panel, there are 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, RS-232 and RS-485 serial bus (M&C)
interfaces. An Alarm/Relay connector provides simple redundancy switching capability.

1Please refer to Advantech’s ‘Communication Processor’ Manual for operational instructions of the
router feature.

33
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The modem’s standard data interface is a synchronous RS-530 interface (25-pin D-sub connector).

Through the use of interface cables, the data port can be converted to a synchronous RS-530/422
interface (37-pin D-sub connector) or a V.35 interface (34-pin Winchester connector).
HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface) is also available: the base AMT-70 supports HSSI operation up
to 60 Mbps (higher speeds are available with option cards). The DVB/ASI interface can also be
supported. Two ASI connectors are provided; one for the modulator data input and one for the
demodulator data output.
The Modem can be controlled and monitored via a variety of protocols from simple RS232, RS485
or Telnet Command Line Interface (CLI), RS485 Packet Protocol, SNMP via Ethernet or Web-
server.
The AMT-70 series modems are powered from a universal power supply with a range from 96 to
263 VAC, 47-63 Hz. The modem is also capable of powering an LNB/BDC (24 VDC, 0.45 A) if this
power supply is fitted.
Finally, the standard BUC power supply produces 24 VDC at a maximum of 3.5 A (Max 110 W).
Optionally, the BUC power supply can be upgraded to 48 VDC, 2.2 A.

1.2.2 AMT-73L Description

The AMT-73L product has one modulator and demodulator. It fully meets MIL-STD-188-165A
standard.

It has the following features:

L-Band output of 950-2000 MHz, tunable in 1 Hz steps;

L-Band input of 950-2000 MHz tunable in 1 Hz steps
Optionally support to 2050MHz on both TX and RX
Optional IF interface: 70+/-18 MHz, 140+/-36 MHz
Optional provision of DC power and reference for Low Noise Block Down Converter (LNB) /
Block Down Converter (BDC) and Block Up Converter (BUC)
FEC: RSV (both Intelsat and DVB-S/DSNG) and eTPC
BPSK/QPSK/8PSK/16QAM/OQPSK modulation
FFT Technology for reliable acquisition
Occupies 1 Rack Unit (RU) of Rack Space (1.75”)
Power Consumption less than 60 W (not including BUC power supply)
Full Monitor and Control Capability using a VT100 type (RS-232) terminal,
Telnet, FTP, (10/100 Base-T Ethernet), and command mode (RS-485).
Optional 48 VDC input power
Optional BUC power supply voltages and currents
EIA/TIA-449, HSSI and Ethernet data interfaces supported

On the back panel, there are 10/100 Base-T Ethernet, RS-232 and RS-485 serial bus (M&C)
interfaces. An Alarm/Relay connector provides simple redundancy switching capability.
The modem’s standard data interface is a synchronous EIA/TIA-449 interface (37-D-sub connector).
HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface) is also available: the base AMT-73L supports HSSI operation up to
52 Mbps (higher speeds are available with other option cards). The AMT-73 series are powered from a
universal power supply with a range from 96 to 263 VAC, 47-63 Hz.

34
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

1.3 Ordering the Products Options

Specific configuration options must be specified at ordering in order to customize your modem
specifically for your configuration.
The chart on the next page depicts the options available for the AMT-70 modem family.
Caution should be taken to insure that the correct modem model is used when DC power is applied
to the BUC.
When your modem is received, you can check the manufacturing setting by using the label on the
top of the modem, centered and near the front panel. It provides the Model Number, Part Number
(the configuration options) the Revision Number, and the Serial Number.

35
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

1 A R M D C S I P F Z X Special Requirements AMT-70 SERIES

OPTION "R" A Laminate with ADV Logo CONFIGURATOR
REDUNDANCY OPTIONS B 1 PPS Input to Modulator (Satnet)
0 Not Fitted C L + 70MHz Rx (U/C + L-Band Tuner)
1
2
** Redundant 1:1 ASI
OPTION "I"
Redundant 1:1 RS-530 OPTION "Z"
3 Redundant 1:1 HSSI DATA INTERFACE OPTIONS
AUXILIARY OPTIONS
4 Redundant 1:12 0 Interface card Not Fitted - (ASI only)
0 Not Fitted
** For TX Only units
A MD
RS-530 + 1x HSSI
1 Direct TX
B
C
* ASI
1xMD
HSSI
2 Group Delay Equalizer
3 Direct TX + Gr Delay Equalizer
D RS-530 + 3 x HSSI + APOC (Astra 688)
OPTION "M" E RS-530 + 8 x G.703 + 1x IP (40M) (Centaur 700)
OPTION "F"
MODULATOR OPTIONS F MD+ 1x HSSI
ASI + RS530
MONITOR & CONTROL OPTIONS
G RS-530 + HSSI + Dopp Buff (SMC 619-004)
0 Not Fitted
H RS-530 + HSSI + 2xIP(67M) + APOC (Aleph 714) 1 Front Panel with Display, Keypad and LED Indicators
A 950 - 1750 MHz
2 Front Panel with LED Indicators only
B 950 - 2000 MHz
J
K
*IDR/IBS + G703 Option H + ASI (IBS/IDR 642) 3 Option 1 + Dial-up ModemMD
C 70 MHz or 140MHz
D
* 950 - 2000 MHzMDand 70/140 MHz
L 3 x DS3 (Under development) 4
5
Option 2 + Dial-up Modem
Option 1 + SNMP
MD
E 70 MHz or 950-2000 MHz
M *RS-530 + HSSI + IP(20M) (SMC+Aero+SW 746)
6 Option 2 + SNMP
F 140 MHz or 950-2000 MHz N *HSSI + IP(20M) (SMC+Aero 668) 7 Option 1 + Dial-up Modem MD+ SNMP
G Option A + ASI P RS530 + 4 x G.703 + IP (Daisy 770)
Note: In OPTION “F”, for RX only units,
H Option B + ASI Q RS-530 + HSSI + ASI(Tx) (SMC 619-005) available options are 2 or 6 .
J Option E + ASI
OPTION "S" OPTION "P"
K Option F + ASI
MAXIMUM DATA RATE OPTIONS POWER & REFERENCE OPTIONS
* Not for future products. 1 10 Mbits/s A AC without BUC PSU or 10MHz Ext Reference In
For backward compatibility only 2 20 Mbits/s B AC with BUC PSU 24V 4A
3 52 Mbits/s C AC with BUC PSU 48V 2A
OPTION "D" 4 140 Mbits/s D AC with BUC PSU 48V 4A
DEMODULATOR OPTIONS E DC -48V
OPTION "C"
F AC without BUC PSU + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In
0 Not Fitted MODULATION & FEC CODING OPTIONS
G AC with BUC 24V 4A + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In
1 950 - 2150 MHz, 75 Ω A INTELSAT BPSK/QPSK + Viterbi (IESS 308/309) H AC with BUC 48V 2A + 10MHz modem Ext Ref In
2 950 - 2150 MHz, 50 Ω B INTELSAT Option A + RSV (IESS308/309)
J AC with BUC 48V 4A + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In
C INTELSAT Option B + 8PSK + PTCM + RSV(IESS 310)
3 70 / 140MHz, 50 Ω D DVB BPSK/QPSK + RSV (DVB-S EN300421)
K DC -48V + 10MHz Modem Ext Ref In
4 165A compliant 950 - 2000 MHz, 50 Ω L DC -48V with passing through BUC 48V 4A
E DVB Option D + 8PSK + PTCM-RS (DVB-DSNG EN301210)
5 DVB-S2 Demodulator (L Band ) 75 Ω Please Note: The greyed out options have not yet
F DVB Option E +16QAM
been released from development.
6 DUAL DVB-S2 Demod (L Band ) 75 Ω G AMT75 DVB-S2 QPSK/8PSK + DVB-S2 EN302307
7 Option 1 + ASI H AMT75 only DVB All modes Option F + Option G Any "Special Requirements" have to be agreed
8 J Turbo BPSK/QPSK + eTPC with engineering before quoting
Option 2 + ASI
K Turbo 8PSK Option J + 8PSK DESIGN BY
9 Option 3 + ASI DATE
L Turbo 16QAM Option K +16QAM N McSparron
A Option 5 + ASI M AMT70 Only Option C + Option F + Option L
B Option 6 + ASI N AMT73L (165A) OQPSK/QPSK/8PSK + PTCM-RS + OM73 DESIGN APPROVAL DATE
J Thomson
C DVB-S2 Demodulator (70MHz) P AMT70 Only Turbo 16QAM Option F + Option L
D R AMT73L Turbo 16QAM Option N + Option L AMT-70 MODEM SERIES
DVB-S2 Demodulator (140MHz) MKT APPROVAL DATE
S AMT73L Turbo 8PSK Option N + Option K G Matthews
E Option C + ASI
T AMT75 Only 16APSK Option H + 16APSK PG 1AR-MDCSIP-FZX
F Option D + ASI
U AMT75 Only 32APSK Option T + 32APSK QA APPROVAL DATE

V AMT70 Only Option C + Option F REV. 11 p.1 of 1

Figure 2: AMT-70 Family: Products Configuration Options

36
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 2 INSTALLATION
2.1 Introduction
This section describes the unpacking, inspection, and installation considerations.

2.2 Unpacking and Inspection

Check for damage to the outside and the inside of the shipping container. If there is any damage,
contact Customer Service and the shipping carrier to report it.

2.2.1 Unpacking
To insure safety and proper operation of this equipment, use the following unpacking and repackaging
guidelines:
1. The equipment is shipped in a high-quality cardboard container and packed with high-density
molded foam. This type of packing material can withstand impairments such as vibration and impact
associated with long-distance shipment. The packing box and foam is the only suitable type of packing
that should be used for shipping the equipment.
2. While unpacking, observe how the equipment is packed. In order to avoid damage, it must be
repackaged in exactly the same manner if you need to ship the unit to another location or return it to
the factory.

The packing consists of one large cardboard box, two foam side caps, and one accessory box. Please
retain these items for future use.

2.2.2 Inventory
Take inventory of the complete package to ensure that all necessary parts are present. A quick review
of your pre-installation site survey form, purchase order, and shipping list should reveal any
discrepancies.

2.2.3 Site Considerations

The installation site should be compatible with the location used for other electronic equipment. That
is, the building should be free from excessive dust and moisture. The room should not exceed the
recommended temperature range (defined at in TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-
70),TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L) or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-75) The
installation location should allow for ample airflow. Also, allow extra room for service access to cables
and wiring.

2.2.4 Installing the unit

Move the unit to the location where it will be installed. Ideally, the unit will be installed into an
equipment rack or a shelf. If necessary, prior to installation into the rack or shelf, remove the three
colored screws on the bottom side of the chassis. The removal of these screws frees up the anti-
vibration mount that was secured during shipping. Install the fan filters onto the external fans, if a
regular maintenance schedule can be provided to clean or replace the fans. Do not install the filters at
a remote location unless quarterly preventative maintenance is performed. Follow the additional
precautions shown below:
Do not block the air holes or the fan cut outs the back panel of the unit. These openings must
be kept clear for the proper cooling of the equipment.

37
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Do not place the units beside each other or on top of each other. The exhaust from one unit
can be drawn into the air intake of another.

Make sure the room is properly cooled. Normal cooling may not be sufficient for locations
where the electrical equipment is installed.
Always make sure the unit’s top cover is installed and secured in place.
If it has not already been done, label each cable that will be attached to the unit. This will
prevent confusion and ensures proper connection.

2.3 Power Requirements

The AC power version of the modem can accommodate power requirements found worldwide. The DC
power of the modems either accepts a plus or minus DC voltage from any 32-72 VDC power source.
Please verify that the power system used at the installation site provides a proper earth ground. In
addition, verify that the voltage setting matches the voltage and power provided by the facility where it
will be installed.

2.3.1 AC Power & Fuse

AC power is applied to the modem via socket JP1 (IEC 320 (M)) on the rear panel.

NOTE:
Only the U.S.-type power cord is shipped with s AMT-70 ist mit einer USA-Schnur nur geliefert.
the AMT-70. Because no international power Da es keine internationalen Schnüre mit dem.
cords are shipped with the AMT-70, you must AMT-70 gibt, muß man eine zugelassene
supply an appropriate approved power cord for Schnur passend für das besondere Land
the country of installation. liefern.

The fuse assembly is attached to the power receptacle. To remove the fuse, press down on the tab
that extends out just below the power receptacle and between the fuse holder. When replacing the
fuse, make sure to use the exact type and rating marked next to the fuse holder.
AC Fuse: 3.15A 250V (time-delay)

2.3.2 DC Power & Fuse

DC power is applied to the AMT-70 modem via a barrier strip labeled JP1 on the rear panel. This
barrier strip has two screw terminals; one positive (+) and the other negative (-). The two input
terminals are floating (neither lead is connected to chassis ground), and therefore can accommodate a
+48 VDC source. Do not tie the positive lead from the source to chassis ground.
DC Fuse: 6.3A 250V (time-delay)

2.4 Modem Rack/Shelf Support

Prior to installing the AMT-70 unit into a rack or shelf, the depth of the supporting structure must be
determined.

38
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 3: Rack Mount Support kit

Rear support kits are available to secure the AMT-70 unit firmly on to the supporting structure:
1. Kit (19A-230001-001) for racks with a depth of 600 mm
2. Kit (19A-230011-001) for racks with a depth of 800 mm
3. Kit (19A-230021-001) for racks with a depth of 700 mm
Each kit contains two supports, two angles and the associated mounting hardware for the proper
installation on the supporting structure.

Note: The left and right supports are attached to the AMT-70 unit with two #6-32 x 5/16 inch Phillips
countersunk screws. Each angle is attached to a support by one #8-32 x 1/2 inch screw, one # 8 lock
washer, one #8 flat washer 3/8 inch outer diameter, one #8 flat washer 1/2 inch outer diameter, and
one #8-32 hexagonal nut.

2.5 Data Connections (AMT-70 Series)

Data connections for the standard AMT-70 series modems include a RS-530 synchronous data port
and a HSSI synchronous data port, a RS-232 and RS-485 asynchronous M&C port, two Ethernet M&C
ports, and a status M&C port on the back of the chassis. Optionally there may also be (2) ASI BNC
connectors, one for input and one for output. The RS-485 port may be used to manage the BUC and
the LNB/BDC. Chapter 8 provides the connector pin-outs for the various interfaces.

39
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

2.5.1 Data Port RS-530

Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 25-pin D-sub (F) connector
labeled TX/RX DATA, RS-530 on the rear panel.
In addition to connector pin-outs, Figure 47 provides cable pin-outs that convert the RS-530 interface
to an RS-530/449 interface.

2.5.2 Data Port HSSI

Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 50-pin SCSI-2 (F) connector
labeled HSSI DATA (P3) (J18 on AMT-73L) on the rear panel. Refer to Figure 50 for pin-outs.

2.5.3 Data Port Ethernet

Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 8-pin RJ-45 (F) connector
labeled 10/100BT DATA (JA on AMT-73L, or ETH0/ETH1 on Dual-IP router equipped modems) on the
rear panel. Refer to Figure 51 for pin-outs.

2.5.4 Monitor and Control RS-232

The terminal is connected to the 9-pin D-sub (F) connector labeled M&C/RS-232 (P8) (refer to Figure
52) on the rear panel, via a straight-through cable.

2.5.5 Monitor and Control RS-485

The rear panel 9-pin D-sub (F) connector labeled M&C RS-485 (P7) (refer to Figure 54) is provided for
RS-485 compatible M&C of the modem and BUCs that are also equipped.

2.5.6 Monitor and Control 10/100BaseT Ethernet

There are two 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C ports on the rear panel. One is labeled P6, and the other is
labeled P1 (both are RJ-45 connectors, see Figure 51 for pin-outs). The P1 connector is used during
manufacturing, and relates to the demodulator only, and should not be used in the field. P6 provides
Ethernet capabilities for all functions of the modem, including the modulator, demodulator, and
interface cards.

2.5.7 Monitor and Control Alarms

The connector labeled P5, a 15-pin D-sub (F) provides Form C relay outputs of the modem’s status.
Refer to Figure 57 for pinouts and status description.

2.5.8 Redundancy
This is an optional feature, although the connector appears on the rear panel (P4, a 15-pin D-sub
female). If the modem is so equipped, refer to Chapter 11 for details. A redundancy kit can be
purchased from AdvantechAMT to allow two modems to be connected in a 1:1 redundancy
configuration.

2.6 Data Connections (AMT-73L Series)

The AMT-73L has a different chassis design compared to the AMT-70. Specifically the RS-530 rear
panel connector is replaced by an EIA/TIA-449 port although the RS-530 is still available as an option if
required, and an External Clock Input has been added. The remaining connectors are the same as for
the AMT-70, above, but with different nomenclatures (see Figure 46).

2.6.1 Data Port EIA/TIA-449/MIL-STD-188-114

Receive and transmit data connections are accomplished through the 37-pin D-sub (f) on the rear
panel (refer to Figure 55 for pin-outs).

40
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

2.6.2 External Clock Reference (MIL-STD-188-115)

The rear panel includes a BNC connector (J14) for connection to an External 5 MHz Clock. When
activated, all frequencies generated within the modem exhibit the same accuracy and stability as this
reference.

2.7 RF/IF Interfaces

2.7.1 Modulator L-Band Output (AMT-70L)

The L-Band output signal is presented on J6 (Type N female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem. If
the modem has been ordered with the BUC power option then the DC voltage is switched onto the
inner conductor of this connector. When installing the modem to the system, BUC power should be
turned off.

The following commands are available via the Command Line Interface for the BUC control.

Command Arguments Description

BUCPOWER OFF, ON BUC Power ON/OFF
BUC Monitor the BUC voltage used
BUCI Monitor the BUC current used
Figure 4: BUC Control Commands

CAUTION:

With BUC power enabled, there is a potentially damaging DC voltage applied to the
modulator output. When connecting test equipment, or a local modulator (or any DC
coupled devices), always use appropriate DC blocks, and disable BUC powering.

2.7.2 Modulator L Band Output (AMT-73L)

The L-Band output signal is presented on J1 (Type TNC female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem.
There are currently no provisions for providing power to the BUC or SSPB.

2.7.3 Demodulator L Band Input (AMT-70L and 75)

The demodulators on all AMT-70L modems are capable of being used in conjunction with most C-band
or Ku-band LNBs or BDCs, with L-Band IF frequencies in the range of 950-2150 MHz. For L-Band
operation, modem has two separate L-Band inputs and a separate L-Band N-Type output, accessed at
the rear of the unit.
There are two inputs to demodulator, useful for receiving from two different polarizations or two
different satellites. One is on J1 (Type F female, 75 Ω), and the other is on J2 (Type F female, 75 Ω).
Either can be connected directly to the Receive IF connector of the appropriate LNB/BDC. The cable
loss should be considered when selecting the cable. The demodulator can additionally provide DC
power (+13/+18 V, 0.4 A), a 22 kHz tone or a 10 MHz reference on the same cable as the L-Band
receive carrier. The ON/OFF state of the LNB power is indicated by an LED on the Front Panel.

41
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CAUTION:
With LNB power enabled, there is a potentially damaging DC voltage applied to the
demodulator input. When connecting test equipment, or a local modulator (or any
DC coupled devices), always use appropriate DC blocks, and disable LNB powering.

The following commands are available to provide DC, tone or reference to the LNB/BDC:

Command Arguments Description

RLNBP OFF, ON LNB DC Powering
RLNBVP OFF, ON LNB Vertical Polarization
RFREF OFF, ON LNB 10MHz Reference
RLNBTO OFF, ON LNB 22kHz Tone

2.7.4 Demodulator L-Band Input (AMT-73L)

The L-Band input signal is presented to J2 (Type TNC female, 50Ω) on the rear panel of the modem.
There are currently no provisions for providing LNB/BDC DC power in the AMT-73L.

2.7.5 Demodulator 70/140 MHz IF Input (AMT-70 and AMT-75)

The demodulator can optionally be ordered with 70/140MHz inputs, in place of the L-Band inputs.
When used in 70MHz input mode, the maximum bandwidth is 36MHz while in the 140MHz mode the
full 54MHz or 72MHz range can be used.
These inputs are capable of operating with the standard C-, X- or Ku-Band BDC, with their outputs
producing 70 MHz on the output. The figure below shows a typical installation using the 70 MHz inputs
and the C-, X-, or Ku-Band down converters with 70 MHz outputs.

2.8 Bringing the Modulator Online

REFERENCE FREQUENCY STABILITY NOTICE

The output frequency of the unit is completely stabilized after approximately 5

minutes after unit power-up. During this warm-up period, it may be desirable to
disable the modulator output (use ‘tsignal off’ command, or access via front
panel menus; see Chapter 4 for front panel operation).

NOTE: Before attempting to bring the modulator on line, the operator should
become familiar with the operation of the modem while off line. Refer to Chapter
3 through 6 to obtain a thorough understanding of modem operation using a
terminal emulator (or PC with terminal emulation program).

When bringing a transmit carrier on line (AMT-70L with BUC power supply), the following sequence
must be followed:

42
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Power on the modem for five minutes to allow the oscillator to stabilize.
Before connecting the L-band cable to the BUC, verify that:
o The frequency of the modulator and demodulator are correctly set
o BUC power is off (bucpower off)
o 10 MHz reference is off (tfref off)
Set modulator power to -25 dBm (tlevel -25)
If required and if the option is fitted, turn on DC power to BUC (bucpower on).
If required and if the option is fitted, turn on 10 MHz reference to the BUC (tfref on).
Increase modulator output power to desired level (tlevel < desired level >).

43
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 3 OPERATIONAL FEATURES

3.1 M&C Interface Descriptions
The AMT-70/AMT-73L/AMT-75 series modems include 3 different communications methods through 4
different communications paths.
These include the following:

Front Panel M&C – The modem comes standard with an active front panel that includes a 40
character by 2-line Vacuum Fluorescent Display (VFD) and a 16-button membrane keyboard.
It also includes LCD status indicators (7 for the AMT-70, 5 for the AMT-73) for a visual
snapshot of modem status.

The active front panel is probably the most convenient means of communicating with the
modem. The display is in English text with few abbreviations and/or acronyms, and several
modem parameters can be entered, displayed, automatically tested, and manually corrected
before actually activating those parameters. Parameters that are out-of-range are automatically
rejected, and an alert message is displayed to the operator (via English text), who then must
manually make the correction before the newly entered parameter(s) are activated.

The active front panel is standard for this modem, however, it can be ordered with a passive
front panel (price compensated) for modems that will only be remotely controlled.

RS-232 M&C Port – The modem comes standard with a rear panel RS-232 asynchronous
serial port that is useful for communicating with the modem using a dumb terminal (a terminal
that has no processing capabilities), such as a VT-100, or the more popular terminal emulation
software, such as HyperTerminal, which is usually included in PC and MAC Windows™
operating software, or Minicom for Linux OS users. Even a PDA (personal digit assistant) with
VT100 terminal emulation software (such as Pilot VT100 software) will work.

Instructions on how to use the RS-232 and the command list is provided in Chapter 5 and
Chapter 6.

RS-485 M&C Port – The rear panel RS-485 asynchronous serial port provides the capability to
address other AMT-70/AMT-73 modems (or other AdvantechAMT products that include a RS-
485 port) using a single PC (personal computer) and a single daisy-chained cable connecting
all the units.

Provisions within the modem provide an address field of 8 binary bits, allowing up to 256
addresses to be assigned. From a single cable in theory up to 32 devices can be connected.
However, AdvantechAMT recommends a maximum of 15 devices, which allows the cable to be
assembled from ribbon cable.

The RS-485 can be set to operate from either a 2-wire where the differential transmit and
receive signals share the same pair, or can be set up to operate in 4-wire operation, where the
differential transmit and receive signals are on separate lines. The modem is shipped with the
2-wire option, but can be changed by using either the active front panel or the RS-232 port.

The RS-485 port can be set to operate in two different modes. One mode is the Command
Line Interface mode which is nearly identical to the RS-232 dumb terminal approach, but with
addressing capability. Refer to Paragraph 7.2 for more information on how to utilize the CLI

45
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
mode from the RS-485 port.

Alternatively, a Packet Protocol mode can be selected. This is recommended for use by
programmers in the development of a Network Management System (NMS) or perhaps when
the modem is to be used in a bandwidth-on-demand system. The Packet Protocol speeds up
the set-up time of a modem or a series of modems. Refer to Paragraph 7.3 for more
information regarding Packet Protocol.

10/100BaseT Ethernet Port – There are two 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C ports on the rear
panel. One port (RJ-45), nearest to the power connector (P1 for AMT-70; J10 for AMT-73L) is
used during manufacturing purposes only, and is not intended for use in the field. The other
port (RJ-45), furthest from the power connector (P6 for AMT-70, J9 for AMT-73L) provides full
capabilities to all functions of the modem, with the same instruction set as is available to the
RS-232 and RS-485 M&C ports.

This port supports SNMP V2 (Simple Network Management Protocol, Version 2) and Telnet.
Setup of the network IP address and the subnet mask can be performed from the active front
panel (Paragraph 4.2.5.5) or the RS-232 serial M&C port (Paragraph 5.9).

Using Telnet in the terminal emulation mode for remote management is described in
Paragraph 5.10.3.

3.2 Acquisition, FEC, Modulation, and Eb/No

3.2.1 Demodulator Acquisition Tips

This section is a useful checklist for debugging the demodulator acquisition process, with some tips for
getting the best performance from the modem.

Check the input connection. The L-Band connection must be connected to the correct input
and the correct input selected under software control. Input 1 is closest to the Ethernet
connector.
Check the LNB control signals. DC power (and therefore polarity selection), 22 kHz switching
tone and 10MHz reference are switched off by default.
Check the L-Band frequency.
Check the demodulator configuration. The spectrum sense may be true or inverted. The
symbol rate, alpha, modulation and coding must be correctly configured. The frequency
acquisition range must be correctly configured – this is described below.
Use the “rstatus details” command to verify that the demodulator has acquired2.
The frequency acquisition range is dependant on symbol rate, the use of FFT assistance and use of
the frequency sweep.
As a basic rule without FFT assistance the frequency acquisition range can be assumed to be 2% of
symbol rate for QPSK and 1% for 8PSK.
If Spectral Analysis (FFT assistance) is enabled – use command rspanl - then the acquisition range for
all modulation types can be assumed to be 10% of Symbol rate. For example at 64 kSymbol
acquisition would be +/- 7kHz. To increase the acquisition range it is possible to set a frequency sweep
using the rsweep (sweep range) and rssize (step size).

2 The front panel LED also indicates if the modulator is locked.

46
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Therefore, to increase the 64kSymbol acquisition range to +/-30 kHz the rsweep command could be
set to 30,000 Hz and the rssize command set to 14kHz.

NOTE:
It is recommended NOT to use the Spectral Analysis (FFT assisted acquisition)
above 3MSymbols. This will significantly slow signal acquisition.

RSPANL (the command which enables or disables FFT assistance) is set to auto by default; in this
case the FFT is only enabled when the bit rate is less than 1.5Mbps.

3.2.2 Choice of FEC

The AMT-70 modem will always support a traditional basic DVB-S (RSV) coding scheme with BPSK
and QPSK modulation – either Intelsat IESS-308/9, or DVB-S (or both). Traditionally Intelsat systems
have been used for telecommunications data (multiple 64kbps streams and T1/E1 traffic) while DVB-S
has been used for MPEG digital video broadcasting. However, DVB systems are increasingly also
being used to transmit data both in MPEG format and as raw data.
DVB FEC systems always concatenate RS and Viterbi coding whereas the Intelsat systems support
RS as an option. Operation without RS can be important when transmitting low-latency services such
as voice traffic: removing the RS decoding overhead.
With BPSK and QPSK modulation, DVB-S supports ½, 2/3, ¾, 5/6 and 7/8 inner code rates with a RS
(204,188) outer code. Intelsat supports ½, ¾ and 7/8 inner code rates with various outer RS code rates
including RS (126,112) and RS (219,201). The Intelsat system without RS codes offers a few 100 data
bits of latency. With RS coding, an interleaver of depth 4 or 8 can be chosen to trade off latency and
performance. The DVB system has approximately 32kbits of latency (code-rate dependent).
The modem can transmit RS-530 or HSSI data using either DVB-S or Intelsat. DVB systems out-
perform (by approximately 1dB) Intelsat systems because they include a better interleaver between the
constituent Viterbi and RS codes.
The AMT-70 Modem also supports higher order modulation systems, such as 8PSK and 16QAM.
These systems are typically used when the link budget permits since, in combination with appropriate
FEC, they permit higher spectral efficiency and hence reduce the required satellite bandwidth.
8PSK modulation is currently more popular than 16QAM as it does not require high-linearity amplifiers
and transponders. The AMT-70 modulator can be enabled to support IESS-310 8PSK systems (a
PTCM 2/3 code, with an RS (219,201) outer code) giving about 2 bits/s/Hz. It can also support DVB-
DSNG (PTCM 2/3, 5/6 and 8/9 rates, with the RS (204,188) code) and eTPC rates 0.75,0.79, 0.87 and
0.92. Turbo modes are about 1dB better than the roughly equivalent DVB-DSNG systems. The Intelsat
system is about 1.5dB inferior to the DVB system, due to differences in the interleaving structure.
The AMT-70 Modem also supports 16QAM in two coding modes: DVB-DSNG and eTPC. DVB-DSNG
16QAM supports ¾ and 7/8 rates with the RS (204,188) outer code. 16QAM with eTPC can usefully
operate in 4 rates: 0.75, 0.78, 0.87 and 0.92.
Important Note: The DVB system can be configured to transmit both MPEG-2 and non MPEG-2 data.
When using DVB modes to transmit non MPEG-2 data it is necessary to turn DVB REMOVE MARK
ON in the demodulator (command RRMVMK ON). This is required, since DVB FEC utilizes the MPEG
framing structure, which must therefore be imposed by the modulator (and similarly removed by the

47
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
demodulator). There is a performance overhead associated with the sync byte, but it is only 0.5% of
data rate.

48
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Mode Modulation Rates

Intelsat 308/309 BPSK, QPSK Rates:
OQPSKI / OQPSKQ ½, ¾ and 7/8 are valid along with
the option of Reed-Solomon OFF/
219 or 126
Intelsat 310 8PSK Rates:
2/3 and again with the option of
Reed-Solomon OFF/ 219 or 126
DVB-S QPSK Rates:
OQPSKI / OQPSKQ ½, 2/3, ¾, 5/6 and 7/8
DVB-DSNG 8PSK and 16QAM Rates
2/3, 5/6 8/9 in 8PSK and ¾ and
7/8 in 16QAM.
DVB-S2S QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, Rates
32APSK ¼, 1/2. 3/5 2/3, ¾, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9
DVB-S2N QPSK, 8PSK, 16APSK, Rates
32APSK 1/2. 3/5 2/3, ¾, 4/5, 5/6, 8/9, 9/10,
1/4
TPC4K PSK,QPSK, oQPSK, 8PSK Rate 4/5 and 3/4
and 16QAM
TPC16K BPSK,QPSK, oQPSK, Rate 2/5, 3/5, 8/9, 7/8 and 19/20.
8PSK and 16QAM
OM73 BPSK, oQPSK and QPSK NONE, 1/2 and 3/4
and NONE

Figure 5: FEC / MODE / RATE Configuration Chart

3.2.3 Pilots Insertion

To aid carrier recovery and a physical layer framing synchronization, the DVB-S2 standards proposes
optional insertion of pilot symbols. The system provides a regular physical layer framing structure,
based on SLOTs of M = 90 modulated symbols, allowing reliable receiver synchronization on the FEC
block structure. A slot is devoted to physical layer signaling, including Start-of-Frame delimitation and
transmission mode definition. This mechanism is suitable also for VCM and ACM demodulator setting.
Carrier recovery in the receivers may be facilitated by the introduction of a regular raster of pilot
symbols (P = 36 pilot symbols every 16 SLOTs of 90 symbols), while a pilot-less transmission mode is
also available, offering an additional 2,4 % useful capacity. The pilot presence/absence in VCM and
ACM can be changed on a frame-by-frame basis.

With the receiver algorithms taken into consideration, carrier synchronization can be achieved in
presence of phase noise of existing outdoor equipment, including the LNB and worst-case thermal
noise for any DVB-S2 mode. Some of the transmission modes, such as for example 8PSK rate 3/5
and rate 2/3, 16APSK rate 3/4 and 32APSK 4/5 required the use of pilot symbols to avoid cycle slips.
For ACM operation, the use of pilot symbols can guarantee continuous receiver synchronization.

3.2.4 Equalizer
Note: The equaliser will only operate in DVB-S2 modes. Pilot symbols must also be enabled.

49
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
The user should employ the least number of equaliser taps to satisfactorily correct for the linear
distortions present in the communication channel. Using more taps than necessary can have adverse
effects.

The number of taps activated must be between 6 and 32 (inclusive), and must be even. The number of
equaliser taps required is programmed as follows:

>req 20
req = 20
>rreset
rreset = OK

All 32 equaliser taps may be used up to a symbol rate of 18712574 baud. Above this symbol rate, the
maximum number of taps that can be selected is limited by the unit. Up to 12 taps may be used at the
maximum demod symbol rate of 45Mbaud.

If the maximum number of permissible taps is exceeded, a warning is issued when the demod is
reconfigured (baud rate is 27.5Mbaud in the example below):

>req 22
req = 22
>rreset
rreset
Equalizer too long for baud-rate

N-taps Max Baudrate (Mbaud)

32 18.71
30 19.96
28 21.39
26 23.03
24 24.95
22 27.22
20 29.94
18 33.27
16 37.43
14 42.77
<=12 45.00

3.2.5 Link Budget Analysis and Eb/No (Viterbi and Viterbi R/S)

There are many satellites available that operate in C or Ku Bands with different transmission
parameters (power, bandwidth, sensitivity, etc.); different tariffs for their use; different operational
requirements and under different regulatory environments. The link budget problem normally consists
of determining the optimum economic solution for the particular network requirements, given the
satellite parameters, the price for utilization of power and bandwidth and the operational restrictions
that may apply.
The link budget should always guarantee a minimum Eb/N0 for worst-case conditions, as a function of
the availability requirements of the network, typically resulting in a BER of 10-7.

The figure on the next page illustrates the minimum Eb/N0 required for different bit rates and code rates

50
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
for Intelsat Viterbi with and without Reed Solomon and the DVB-S and DVB-DSNG formatted Viterbi
with RS.
Onto this value must be added link margin; this includes rain margin, pointing loss, etc. For example, if
a -3 dB rain margin is added, the link will normally be operating at better than 10-10 BER under clear sky
conditions. The figure also shows examples of the allocated bandwidth (or channel spacing) for each of
the carrier types.
Out-of-beam emission limits or downlink emission limits as defined by the regulatory environment in the
country where the network is being installed are also an issue: there may be a limit on the minimum or
maximum antenna size to be used.

51
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 6: Allocated Bandwidth and Eb/No for Viterbi and Viterbi + Reed Solomon

Transmission Method Channel Spacing Eb/N0 @ 10-07 (Typical) dB

Viterbi & Viterbi R/S (Rounded)
INTELSAT SYSTEM Viterbi Viterbi + R/S Viterbi Viterbi + R/S
2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 2870 kHz 3025 kHz 6.5 4.4
2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 1915 kHz 2085 kHz 7.8 5.9
2048 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 1640 kHz 1785 kHz 9.0 6.9
256 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 360 kHz 390 kHz 6.5 4.4
256 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 240 kHz 260 kHz 7.8 5.9
256 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 205 kHz 225 kHz 9.0 6.9
128 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 180 kHz 195 kHz 6.5 4.4
128 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 120 kHz 130 kHz 7.8 5.9
128 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 105 kHz 115 kHz 9.0 6.9
128 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 360 kHz 390 kHz 6.5 4.4
64 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 90 kHz 100 kHz 6.5 4.4
64 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 60 kHz 65 kHz 7.8 5.9
64 kbps, QPSK, rate 7/8 55 kHz 60 kHz 9.0 6.9
64 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 180 kHz 180 kHz 6.5 4.4
32 kbps, QPSK, rate 1/2 45 kHz 50 kHz 6.5 4.4
32 kbps, QPSK, rate 3/4 25 kHz 30 kHz 7.8 5.9
32 kbps, BPSK, rate 1/2 90 kHz 100 kHz 6.5 4.4
Viterbi with RS (204,188)
Eb/N0 @ 10-11 BER (Quasi Error
DVB SYSTEM Actual Channel Free) dB
Code Rate Spacing
DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 1/2 0.46 30.4 MHz 4.1
DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 2/3 0.61 23.0 MHz 4.6
DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 3/4 0.69 20.3 MHz 5.1
DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 5/6 0.77 18.2 MHz 5.6
DVB-S 20 Mbps, QPSK, Rate 7/8 0.81 17.3 MHz 6.0
DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 2/3 0.614 30.4 MHz 6.5
DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 5/6 0.77 24.2 MHz 7.9
DVB-DSNG 40 Mbps, 8PSK, Rate 8/9 0.82 22.8 MHz 8.4
DVB-DSNG 60 Mbps, 16QAM, Rate 3/4 0.69 30.4 MHz 8.6
DVB-DSNG 60 Mbps, 16QAM, Rate 7/8 0.81 25.9 MHz 10.3

3.3 Modem Applications and Typical Operating Scenarios

The AMT-70 modem series supports a wide variety of coding schemes and data interfaces allowing its
use in a variety of applications. An overview of some of the common applications and modes are
outlined in this section of the manual. The AMT-73 is primarily designed to operate in the SCPC mode,
although it can be optioned to operate as a DVB Modulator or Data Broadcast Modulator as well.

3.3.1 DVB (MPEG-2) Modulator

The AMT-70 can be configured as a DVB Modulator carrying MPEG-2 traffic. The specific model
number for the modulator-only product is AMT70 (TX only) for DVB-S or DVB-DSNG and AMT-75 for a

52
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
unit supporting DVB-S, DVB-DSNG and DVB-S2 SHORT and NORMAL blocks. In this configuration,
the ASI input is used to receive MPEG-2 data for onward transmission. It is possible to include a
Demodulator in the same 1RU unit. This can be used to monitor the Modulator output and it outputs an
ASI stream.
There are two generally supplied configurations for this mode of operation – redundant and non-
redundant. Redundancy support may be provided without the need for an external controller.

3.3.2 Data Broadcast Modulator

Traditionally DVB modulators have been used in conjunction with MPEG-2 data encapsulators to
provide a high-speed data distribution forward link into a star-network. The return link is then typically
achieved using SCPC modulators such as the AdvantechAMT-10 or via terrestrial modems. The AMT-
70 can be operated in this mode if required: typically for these systems, taking input from ASI.
However, it is also possible to directly connect the Modulator to the output of an IP router using the
HSSI interface. The modulator can still operate in a DVB mode – the user selects the DVB FEC /
Modulation mode they desire and unframed data. The Modulator then inserts the required DVB sync
marks into the data stream and transmits it. At the remote station, the user has several solutions
available to receive the data stream including the AdvantechAMT SBR-70 single board receiver or third
party receivers.
TCP/IP data can be encapsulated in frame relay format in the Router. This mode of operation can save
significant money in the head-end, as DVB IP encapsulation is no longer required. The use of eTPC
can also significantly reduce the satellite bandwidth cost over the lifetime of the system. The AMT70
can also be order with an inbuilt IP router removing the need for expensive external data encapsulator
units.

3.3.3 SCPC Modem

AMT-70 supports traditional SCPC modem applications, offering a wide choice of data-rate from
64kbps to 52Mbps on the RS-530 and HSSI data ports and from 256 kbps to 140 Mbps on the ASI
data port. Current options include 10/100 Base-T Ethernet and Triple HSSI. Future options for the data
ports will include multiple E1, T1, E3, DS-3. Many features of the modem can be upgraded as required
in the field allowing the product capability to grow as your traffic and revenue increases.

3.3.4 Bandwidth-On-Demand Modem

The AMT-70 can be operated in a Bandwidth-On-Demand (BOD) mode with the appropriate network
software, and the use a separate control channel for setting up the link. This control channel could be
a separate channel over the satellite, a dial-up RS-232 or RS-485 modem, or the more popular Internet
whereby the 10/100BaseT M&C port is connected to a low-speed dial-up Ethernet modem or a high-
speed cable, DSL (digital subscriber line), or ISDN (integrated services digital network) line. The use
of a router in this latter choice allows other modems at that earth station location to be addressed from
a single Internet connection.

3.3.5 Broadcast Mode

The AMT-70 series modem is well equipped to operate in a broadcast mode whereby a single
outbound carrier can be transmitted to a series of receive sites. A companion demodulator, called our
SBR-70, installed at each of these receive sites, which have the same wideband data capability with
Viterbi and Viterbi Reed Solomon, can then be set to receive these broadcast signals in either the
DVB-S, DVB-DSNG, or Intelsat formats. Equipped with the optional eTPC turbo cards, the modulator
and demodulator can be used in a proprietary and powerful FEC algorithm.

3.4 Default, Memory Store and Recall Modes

The modem incorporates a default option that sets the modem to a known set of known parameters
preset at the factory. Additionally the modem includes 10 memory store and recall modes that can be
preset by the customer for instant recall and activation, similar to that of a pushbutton radio.

53
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

An example of the latter’s use would be for a simple BOD system, where there have been up to 10
satellite channels set aside for communication with as many as perhaps 100 remote terminals. Each
remote modem would have previously been preset to those channels, and merely recalling and
activating the memory location of an inactive satellite channel places that site (or modem) online.

3.4.1 The default configuration

The default configuration file is static file template defined to configure the modem in a well-known
operational state. If two modems are configured back-to-back in default mode they should
communicate with each other after the default command is run.
1. The CLI “default” command can be used
2. On the front-panel the FUNC/CONFIG/DEFAULT load this configuration
FUNC:
DEFAULT LOAD.CFG SAVE.CFG
You must note that the default file is static and cannot be changed by the modem operator. The
DEFAULT parameters are as follows:

Figure 6: AMT70 Modem Default Parameters

Modulator Parameters Demodulator Parameters Interface Parameters
Data Rate Units BPS Data Rate Units BPS Interface Type rs530
Data Rate 5,000,000 Data Rate 5,000,000 Transmit Clock internal
Modulation QPSK Demodulation QPSK Receive Clock local
Code Type INTELSAT Code Type INTELSAT Loopback Mode off
Code Rate 1/2 Code Rate 1/2 Tx Clock Inversion off
RS Rate off RS Rate off Rx Clock Inversion off
Diff Encoder ON Diff Decoder ON Doppler Buffer Mode auto
Scrambler ON Descrambler ON Tx Data Inversion off
Carrier Freq 1,000,000,000 Carrier Freq 1,000,000,000 Rx Data Inversion off
Spectrum Invert NORMAL Spectrum Invert auto
Filter Alpha 0.35 Filter Alpha 0.35
Transmit Level -25 FFT Spectrum Anal AUTO
Tx Signal on Sweep Range 250,000
IF Loopback OFF Sweep Step Size 50,000
Tx Output Band Lband Rx Input input1
Tx Data Input INTERNAL_PRBS LNB Power OFF
BER Test Pattern 2_23 LNB Tone Status OFF
RS Interleaver depth4 LNB 10 MHz Ref OFF
CW Carrier off Raw Data via MPEG off
Tx Reset RS Interleaver depth4
Rx Offset 0
Rx Clock Option ext
D/C Mute Mode3 off
Rx Reset

3 Available only on AMT-73 modem

54
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

NOTE:
When the default command is executed the last modem parameters entered are also reset.
DEFAULT should not be executed while the modem is online, since it may disrupt other
traffic users operating from the same satellite. It is primarily to be used for bench testing,
ONLY.

3.4.2 Programmable Memory Configurations

The programmable memory configurations are specific user configurations defined and saved by the
modem operator. They are kept in a command list file on flash. Up to 10 configuration files can be
saved / restored.
There are two ways to manage these configurations:
1. In CLI mode
loadcfg <n>
savecfg <n>
listcfg <n>
2. From the Front-Panel
FUNC / CONFIG
DEFAULT LOAD.CFG SAVE.CFG
The way to create a configuration file is as follows;
1. You can change some modem values in the CLI command mode and/or from the front panel
selections for your specific configuration.
2. When it’s time to save your specific configuration, use the command line ‘savecfg [n]” where
n=0 to 9. You can also use the option SAVE.CFG from the front-panel and select the
configuration number you want to save using the numeric keypad.

The way the firmware creates the “saved file” is by querying all the modem cards for the active
setup and writing these values on flash.
Finally, you load/reload a configuration “saved” using the LOAD.CFG option. You must note that this
configuration becomes the “active setup” only when the TRESET / RRESET commands are explicitly

NOTE:
It is recommended that one of these locations be used to store the most current operational
characteristics after the modem is placed online and becomes operational. This would allow for a
quick retrieval of the last known good parameters in the event a parameter change is made,
whether invoked manually, by some software glitch, power failure, or the like.

used.

55
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

3.5 Clock Options and Buffers – Standard Interface Card

The AMT-70 and AMT-73L includes many clocking options that can be selected to satisfy a multitude
of satellite conditions. The standard AMT-70 modulator includes three different options, and the
standard AMT-73L includes five different options. Both the standard AMT-70 demodulator and the
standard AMT-73L have four different options. Figure 7 is a simplified block diagram of the modem
that shows the clocking options.

SerialData
TX
DATAIN SD TXReed Viterbi
Jitter
WriteClock Solomon Encoder
Buffer
Encoder& Modulator& IFOUTPUT
Write
Clock
Scrambler IF
Turbo
NearEnd Encoder
TT
TT RS-530 Framer/ Internal
Loopback
or ST Deframer/IBS IF
ST HSSI Scrambler/ FarEnd Loopback
Interface Descrambler Internal
Internal Loopback
Turbo
Timing Decoder
Encoder& IF& IFINPUT
Demod Scrambler Demodulator
RT Clock
RX
DATAOUT RXReed Viterbi
Doppler
RD DemodD Solomon Decoder
Buffer

NearEnd FarEnd
Interface Interface
Loopback Loopback
EXTCLK

Figure 7: Functional Block Diagram of AMT-70/73L modem

The terminology used herein is based on the RS-530/422 mnemonics, which includes such
abbreviations as TT for Terminal Timing, ST for Send Timing, RT for Receive Timing, SD for Send
Data, and RD for Receive Data.
The modem is always a DCE (Data Communications Equipment, which normally supplies the clock to
the DTE (Data Terminal Equipment). Crossover cables for interfacing to equipment that supports only
the DCE interface is provided in Chapter 8.
The modulator incorporates a transmit de-jitter buffer that reduces the amount of jitter from the DTE
terminal. It is always in the transmit path, and has a fixed size. This size is varied depending on the
FEC system. A command (TXJTRST) allows the variation of the de-jitter buffer to be measured.
The demodulator incorporates a Doppler Buffer that can be bypassed or activated. The Doppler Buffer
length is operator programmable for length and is automatically centered. The lowest limit is 32 bytes
and the maximum upper limit is 65536 bytes (approx 0.5Mbits). Length is related to data rate; the lower
the data rate, the smaller the buffer.
The Doppler Buffer can also be used as a Plesiochronous Buffer, where the near end modem and far
end modem are operating with dissimilar (but accurate) clocks. Using the buffer in this fashion, clock

56
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
slips occur and should be expected. When used as a Plesiochronous Buffer, the size of the buffer
should be greater than if it is being used as a Doppler Buffer to reduce the periodic clock slip
occurrences.

NOTE:
The length of the buffer is related to latency and data rate. It may not be appropriate,
for example, to choose a buffer length of 64 kbits if the data rate is 64 kbps, unless a
latency of 1 second is acceptable.

The Doppler buffer can be occasionally centered by invoking the IFBUFRESET command.
THIS COMMAND MAY CAUSE A MOMENTARY DISRUPTION OF MODEM TRAFFIC.
The flexibility of the AMT-70/73 clocking provides the following options:

TRANSMIT CLOCK OPTIONS

• Transmit Internal Clock (SCT) – This is the normal operation, where the modem provides ST
to the DTE device, and the DTE provides TT in return (not always).
• External Mode (Transmit Terrestrial Clock) (SCTE) – In this mode the DTE provides the
transmit clock, and the modem synchronizes to that clock.
• RX Loop-Timing (SCR) – When selected the modem synchronizes its transmit clock with the
clock it receives from the demodulator. This avoids the possibility of clock slips of dissimilar
clocks (near end/far end).
• RS530TFD – This option using clock recovery is used when the DTE does not return TT, and
therefore the modem has to recreate the modem’s internal transmit clock from the data. This is
standard for the AMT-73L modem. It only operates on RS530/EIA449 data.

RECEIVE CLOCK OPTIONS

• Doppler Buffer Mode – This Doppler buffer can be switched between AUTO mode and
Manual Mode. In AUTO mode the buffer selects what is considered a reasonable delay. In
Manual mode the user can specify a buffer length between 32 and 65536 bytes. To effectively
disable the buffer select RX Timing to DEMOD, select Manual mode for the buffer and enter a
32byte delay. NOTE after every demodulator reconfigure (RRESET command) the
IFBUFRESET command should be issued to reset the Doppler buffer fill level to mid-point.
• Buffer Enabled, LOCAL, (SCT) Synced to Internal TX ST Clock – In this mode, the buffer is
enabled, the data from the demodulator is clocked into the buffer by the Demod Clock, but is
clocked out by the ST clock.
• Buffer Enabled, DTE_TT, (SCTE) Synced to External TT Clock – In this case the TT clock is
used to transmit the data out of the Doppler Buffer.
• Buffer Enabled, DEMOD, (SCR) Synced to Demodulator derived Reference – In this mode
the demodulator clock is de-jittered to remove high frequency jitter before clocking out of the
Doppler buffer. Low frequency jitter will not be filtered.

57
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

3.5.1 Transmit Timing

Data can be clocked into and out of the transmit de-jitter buffer via the four clocking modes described
below:
3.5.1.1 Internal Clock (SCT)
The modem supplies the clock to the DTE device, which uses that clock to transmit the data out of its
buffer. The modem issues ST to the DTE, and the DTE device returns TT to the modem. In some
cases, the DTE does not return TT, which is acceptable for low data rates, but for higher data rates,
AdvantechAMT cannot guarantee clock/data relationships due to delays induced by varying cable
lengths.
This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK internal (SCT).
3.5.1.2 External (Terrestrial) Clock (SCTE)
The DTE device supplies the clock to the modem (TT), which uses its internal clock to transmit the data
out of its buffer. The modem uses the TT clock to 1) clock the SD into the jitter buffer, and 2)
synchronize its internal modem clock. The internal modem clock, which is smoothed, clocks the data
out of the jitter buffer, which removes the short-term jitter that may appear on the incoming data.
This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK external (SCTE).
3.5.1.3 Loop Timing (SCR)
The modem’s Demod Clock supplies the clock to the DTE device, which uses that clock to transmit the
data out of its buffer. The modem issues ST to the DTE, and the DTE device returns TT to the modem.
In some cases, the DTE does not return TT, which is acceptable for low data rates, but for higher data
rates, AdvantechAMT cannot guarantee clock/data relationships due to delays induced by varying
cable lengths.
This mode is useful when the far end modem has to provide a clock to the DTE equipment, which is
now synchronized to the clock from the near end modem.
This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK rxloop (SCR).
3.5.1.4 RS530TFD Clock Recovery
This special feature is standard with the AMT-73L modem. It is a requirement that the modem extract
the internal clock from the incoming data in the absence of TT per MIL-STD-188-165A. This operates
on the RS530/EIA449 data interface.
This mode is entered by selecting IFTXCLOCK rs530tfd.

3.5.2 Receive Timing

Data can be clocked into and out of the Doppler Buffer via the four clocking modes described below:
3.5.2.1 Doppler Buffer Auto
In this mode the Modem automatically selects what is considered to be an appropriate fill level (delay)
for the Doppler buffer. This mode can be used with any of the RX Timing modes.
Note: If IFRXCLOCK is set to ‘demod (SCR)’ then the Doppler buffer should be configured to Manual
mode with a low fill level (32 to 100bytes) to minimize latency.

58
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

3.5.2.2 Doppler Buffer Enabled – Internal ST Clocking (SCT)

The internally generated transmit clock (ST) is used to clock the data out of the Doppler Buffer. A
complex scheme allows the Doppler buffer to start from the center, then as the Demod Clock varies
due to the diurnal of the satellite movement, it will vary + and - around center to maintain the bit
integrity of the output data (RD) without any Doppler shift.This mode is entered by selecting
IFRXCLOCK local (SCT).

3.5.2.3 Doppler Buffer Enabled – External TT Clocking (SCTE)

The externally generated transmit clock (TT) is used to clock the data out of the Doppler Buffer. A
complex scheme allows the Doppler buffer to start from the center, then as the Demod Clock varies
due to the diurnal of the satellite movement, it will vary + and - around center to maintain the bit
integrity of the output data (RD) without any Doppler shift.
This mode is entered by selecting IFRXCLOCK DTE TT (SCTE).

3.6 Loop-back, Pure Carrier, and BER Test Functions

Warning:
Invoking any of the loopback, Pure Carrier, and BER test functions will
cause the modem to disrupt normal traffic through the modem. These
tests should only be performed with the modem placed offline.

The AMT-70 and AMT-73L includes three built-in loop-back functions that allow maintenance functions
to be performed on the modem and external circuitry. There are two data loop-back functions and one
IF loop-back function. Activating the either of the two data loop-back functions (either/or) invokes a
near end or a far end loop-back. The IF loop-back is only a local (near end) loop-back. Loop-backs are
a keen method of isolating a problem to a particular area.
Both modems support the activation of a pure carrier, which allows offline testing of the modulator
output, such as phase noise, frequency accuracy. Caution should be taken in the activation of a pure
carrier node, since it places all of the energy into a single frequency. This may cause interference
problems with others sharing the satellite transponder.
The AMT-70 and AMT-73L include a built-in BER generator and tester that allow a maintenance
operator to thoroughly test modem before placing it on line. While in this mode, the modem is
effectively off line, since the modulator will produce a test pattern polynomial, and, to be effective, the
demodulator will test that test pattern with one of its stored polynomials.

3.6.1 Data Interface Near End/Far End Loop-back

The data interface loop-back is directly at the input of the interface. When activated, the near end
Interface loop-back returns the transmit data (TD) and clock (TT) directly to the receive data (RD) and
receive clock (RT) without going through any active components. The far end loop-back (both are
activated simultaneously) sends RD and RT to TD and TT, respectively. Testing at the far end modem

59
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
therefore tests both modems completely.Thee near end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE
line local. The far end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE line far.

60
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

3.6.2 Data System Near End/Far End Loop-back

A data system internal loop-back is in between the framer (if so equipped) and the FEC
encoder/decoder. Activation of the near end internal loop-back therefore tests the interface card
(clocking and framer) of the local modem, and testing from the far end checks the modulator and
demodulator (including FEC, scrambler, and differential coder) of the distant end modem, plus the
entire modem at the testing end.
The near end mode is entered by selecting IFLOOPMODE system local. The far end mode is entered
by selecting IFLOOPMODE system far.

3.6.3 IF Loop-back
Data can be clocked into and out of the Doppler Buffer via the four clocking modes described below:
This mode is entered by selecting TLOOPBACK on, and then selecting RINPUT loopback.

3.6.4 Pure Carrier Mode

A pure carrier can be generated which allows testing of the modulator without modulated data. Care is
needed before using this mode since this could cause interference with other traffic on the same
satellite transponder. If the modulator is configured and operating in any mode, then select TCWT on.
The CW power is equivalent to the normal modulated power.

3.6.5 Internal BER Test Pattern Generator and Tester

The AMT-70/73L provides the means of testing the modulator and the demodulator circuitry. By
activating one of 10 test patterns (5 non-inverted; 5 inverted) from the modulator, a demodulator
equipped with a like BER tester (or a BER tester itself) can test the link integrity and obtain a
reasonable Eb/No and BER of the satellite link – assuming that the demodulator is on the other end of
a satellite link. Or it can be used to test a new modem prior to putting it online. The test pattern
polynomials generated by the modulator are standard BER test patterns provided by most BER testers.
Note that the AMT70/73L demodulator has a built-in true BERT measurement function. This ONLY
operates on 2_23 true PRBS mode and the measured BER can be viewed using the
RX>MONITOR>BERT display on the front panel. The BERT statistics can be reset using the TEST
menu> FAULT.RST function.

• Example 1: Set the far end modulator of an AMT-70/73L to one of the test patterns, then set
the near end AMT-70/73L demodulator to the same test pattern. By observing RSNR, or
REBNO, and or REBER (estimated BER), a fairly accurate link performance can be obtained.
Raising or lowering the TLEVEL at the sending end will increase/decrease Eb/No readings.
RBER can also be used if the polynomial pattern is PRBS 2_23.

Both the modulator and demodulator need to be on the same frequency, data rate, FEC type,
FEC code rate, etc.

Both ends of the link can be tested merely by switching the transmitting source and the
receiving end.

61
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
• Example 2: A local test with noise would be to receive a downlink feed, mix it through a power
divider with the modulator output, then feed the mixed output from the power divider to the
demodulator desiring to be tested. This test assumes that the modulator is off line. Place the
modulator frequency within an area that is supporting no carriers. An inline pad may be
necessary if the TX carrier is too high in level. The desirable level is where the modulated
carrier is approximately level with the received carriers off the satellite.

Use the S/N + N values from Chapter 13B to obtain conversion to Eb/No values.

This mode is entered by selecting TPRBS and selecting the modulator test pattern 2_23. Once the
modulator and demodulator is configured and passing data, accurate BER, raw BER, Eb/No and SNR
values can be taken by observing RBER, REBER, REBNO and RSNR results.

3.6.6 BER Measurement

Note that the AMT70 and AMT73L provides two means of analyzing link error rate performance

When the Modulator is operating with INTERNAL_PRBS of 2^15-1 then the front panel menu
MONITOR>RX>BER shows the real Bit Error Rate measured from errors detected on the PRBS
sequence. The BER can be reset by selecting FUNC>TEST>RESET>RX.STATS. This measure can
be accessed via the CLI command RBER. NOTE: THIS VALUE IS MEANINGLESS WHEN THE
MODEM IS RECEIVING REAL DATA TRAFFIC.

There is also an Estimated BER, which is useful when the modem is operating with real data. This is
displayed on the front panel MONITOR>RX>EST.BER. This can be accessed from the CLI using the
command REBER.

3.7 ASI Interfaces

The AMT70 supports two main ASI input modes of operation selected via the TX>INPUT field:

• MPEG_VIA_ASI
• VBR_MPEG_ASI

MPEG_VIA_ASI does NOT change the incoming DVB MPEG ASI stream. Therefore the Modulator
symbol rate / bit rate must be configured to match the incoming bit rate otherwise the Input buffer will
overflow or underflow. The Modulator can operate with an incoming bit-rate up to +/- 200ppm
tolerance.

VBR_MPEG_ASI does allow the modulator to insert DVB NULL packets into the incoming MPEG-2
data stream. The modulator corrects any PCR values in the stream to compensate for the insertion of
null packets. In this mode the incoming data stream must never exceed the bit-rate set on the
Modulator.

62
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 4 ACTIVE FRONT PANEL

It is recommended that Chapter 3 be reviewed to understand the operational features of this modem
prior to setting up the modem.

4.1 Quick Start Guide

Modems equipped with the active front panel (LCD display and keypad) provide an easy way to quickly
setup a modem and place it online without any connection to a PC or generic control system. This
paragraph is intended to provide a guide for maintenance personnel to quickly setup the modem using
the active front panel. Two scenarios are considered; the first one is for bench testing of the modem,
and the other is for actually setting up the modem and placing it online.

4.1.1 Bench Test Setup

Assuming the modem has just been powered up, perform the following steps:
A WELCOME menu (Paragraph 4.2.3) appears.
Hit any key, and the MAIN MENU (Paragraph 4.2.4) appears.
Arrow over to FUNC (Paragraph 4.2.5.5), hit ENT (for enter), then arrow over to CONFIG, and
hit ENT again.
In the CONFIG sub-menu, arrow over to DEFAULT, and hit ENT twice.
This places the Modulator and Demodulator into a factory DEFAULT configuration, which is 5
Mbps, ½ rate QPSK, Intelsat Viterbi, no Reed Solomon, Modulator in BER Test mode with a
223 test pattern, and the Tx and Rx frequencies set to 1 GHz. And most importantly, it sets the
Tx power output to -25 dBm, which is the lowest calibrated power output from the modem.
Now, with an IF coaxial cable (L band) connected through an inline pad (the Tx output has a
range of 0 to -25 dBm, the Rx input has a range of -35 to -55 dBm, depending on data rate),
the modem could be fully tested using the built-in BER demodulator tester. See A.2.7 for the
AMT-70L modem, or for the AMT-73L, or check the Specifications in TECHNICAL
SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-70) or TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS (AMT-73L) for actual
demodulator power input ranges.

Remember that there is an impedance mismatch between the Tx output (50 Ω) and the Rx input (75
Ω). Figure 8 provides a suggested loop-back cable assembly that would be appropriate for
interconnecting the Tx output to (one of) the Rx input(s). All of these items are readily available from
specialized electronic stores, or can be purchased from AdvantechAMT.
Figure 8: AMT-70L or AMT-73L Loopback Cable Assembly

N (m ) to N (m )
Cable Assy.
50 Ohms F (m ) to F (m )
N (f) to F (f) F (m ) to F (f) Cable Assy.
N (f) to F (m ) 10-30 dB
Im pedance 75 Ohms
DC Block Attenuator
Match Adaptor
From Tx T
Output in

63
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

If these loop-back components are not readily available, you could use the internal IF loop-back mode
of the modem. To activate the internal IF loop-back mode, perform the following:
From the MAIN MENU, arrow to TEST, hit ENT.
With the M of MODE flashing, hit ENT
Arrow to LOOPBACK, select ON, and hit ENT.
From the MAIN MENU, arrow to RX, hit ENT.
Arrow down to INPUT, hit ENT.
Select LOOPBACK and hit ENT
This is an absolute BER test capability that provides accurate results. To review the results, perform
the following:
From the MAIN MENU (if in a different menu, hit CLR once or twice to get back to the MAIN
MENU), arrow over to MONITOR and hit ENT.
Arrow over to RX and hit ENT.
Arrow down several times until BER appears in the upper left corner of the display. It will
display unlocked while the modem is acquiring the signal.
It may be necessary to raise the power output to get the modem to acquire. To do this, perform the
following steps:
From the MAIN MENU, arrow over to TX and hit ENT.
Hit ENT when the T in TX flashes.
Arrow down (twice) until POWER = -xx dBm appears (xx should actually be -25 at this time).
Arrow over until the P in POWER is flashing. Hit ENT.
Change the power output by arrowing over to each value and then use the keypad to enter the
number. When the number is correct, hit ENT, and the new value entered will be executed.
Once the demodulator locks up, the BER readout will display the actual number of accumulated errors.
(You must be in MONITOR MAIN MENU and BER, as above.) Other estimated values, such as SNR,
Eb/No, baud (symbol) rate, AGC (labeled POWER.AGC) can be observed during this BER testing by
arrowing up or down while in the MONITOR menu.
If a different data rate, code rate, FEC type, or modulation scheme is desired, use the information from
Figure 6 to change those parameters:

Figure 9: Parameter Changes in Test Mode

TX Main Menu RX Main Menu
PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED
VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE
MOD QPSK 16QAM DEMOD QPSK 16QAM
UNITS BPS BPS UNITS BPS BPS
CARR FRQ 1000000000Hz 0950000000Hz CARR FRQ 1000000000Hz 0950000000Hz
DATA 005000000BPS 2048000BPS DATA 005000000BPS 2048000BPS
CODE INTELSAT TPC16K CODE INTELSAT TPC16K
RATE ½ 8/9 RATE 1/2 8/9
RSRATE OFF OFF RSRATE OFF OFF

ENTER the changed values from the TX and RX menus, then page down to RECONFIGURE =
READY, press enter and then enter again to CONFIRM.

64
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

This example will change the 5 Mbps data rate to 2.048 Mbps, the FEC to eTPC (Turbo) with a 8/9
code rate. The Tx and Rx frequencies also change from 1 GHz to 950 MHz.

NOTE:
When completed with the bench testing, remember that the Modulator is in the BER test mode. To
return the Modulator to an operational status (passing external data), go to TX (MAIN MENU), hit
ENT, arrow down to INPUT, hit ENT, arrow to EXTERNAL or required ASI mode, and hit ENT
again. Follow this with TX RECONFIGURE and hit ENT twice.

4.1.2 Placing Modem Online

Before placing a modem online, it is important to turn off the transmit carrier and perhaps the DC
voltages and 10 MHz Reference to the BUC and LNB. These are found in menus TX – SGN OFF,
FUNC – CONTROL – BUC - REF OFF, FUNC – CONTROL – LNB –LNBPWR OFF, and FUNC –
CONTROL – LNB - LNBREF OFF.

NOTE:
The BUC and LNB Power and Reference are not currently available for the AMT-73L modem. The
AMT-73L also has only one Rx input.

The following example programs the modem to 8PSK, ¾ Rate TPC, the data rate to 256 kbps, and the
Tx and Rx L band frequencies set as indicated. The demodulator utilizes the FFT mode for acquisition.

Figure 10: Modem Commands Quick Start Guide

PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED

VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE
TX Main Menu RX Main Menu
MOD QPSK 8PSK DEMOD QPSK 8PSK
UNITS BPS BPS UNITS BPS BPS
CARR FRQ 1000000000Hz 1234567000Hz CARR FRQ 1000000000Hz 1234590000Hz
DATA 005000000BPS 256000BPS DATA 005000000BPS 256000BPS
CODE INTELSAT TPC4K CODE INTELSAT TPC4K
RATE 1/2 3/4 RATE 1/2 3/4
RSRATE OFF OFF DESCRAM ON ON
SGN ON OFF RSRATE OFF OFF
DIFF ON ON LNBTO OFF OFF or ON
INPUT INTERNAL_PRBS EXTERNAL LNBVP OFF OFF or ON
OUTPUT LBAND LBAND LNBPWR OFF OFF
TX 2_23 Any REF EXT INT or EXT
SPTRM INV NORMAL Either ALPHA 0.35 0.35
ALPHA 0.35 0.35 DIFF ON ON
SCRAM ON ON SSIZE 50000 Auto, FFT mode
INTL DEPTH4 Either SWEEP 250000 Auto, FFT mode
REF OFF Either SPTRM INV AUTO AUTO
INTERFACE Menu CARD INPUT INPUT1 INPUT1 or 2
MODE rs530 Any, except RAW DATA
disable
INTERLEAVER DEPTH4 Either
DESCRAM ON ON

65
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED PARAMETER CURRENT DESIRED

VALUE VALUE VALUE VALUE
LNB REF OFF OFF or ON
INTERFACE Menu TX OFFSET 0 0
TTINV OFF OFF or ON SPTRM FFT OFF ON
CLOCKING LOCAL Any, depending on INTERFACE Menu RX
operation
INTERFACE Menu LOOPBACK RTEDGEINV OFF OFF or ON
LINE LOCAL LINE LOCAL LINE LOCAL CLOCKING LOCAL Any, DTE_TT and
LOCAL invoke the
Doppler Buffer
LINE FAR LINE FAR LINE FAR INTERFACE Menu BUFFER
SYSTEM LOCAL SYSTEM LOCAL SYSTEM LOCAL BUFFER MODE AUTO MANUAL or AUTO
SYSTEM FAR SYSTEM FAR SYSTEM FAR BUFFER DEPTH ---- 32-65536 bytes,
automatically
selected in AUTO
mode

ENTER the changed values from the TX and RX menus, then page down to RECONFIGURE =
READY, press enter and then enter again to CONFIRM. If other options are selected, the modem
verifies that the parameters selected are within range. If not in range, the display will present a msg.
FEC not supported. If this occurs, use Figure 10 to determine which parameter is out of range. If the
parameters are within range, the msg. following CONFIRM is Current settings saved.
When all of the parameters are entered and confirmed, now would be the time to connect the modem
to the satellite feed, turn on the TX carrier (SGN = ON), followed by the BUC and LNB voltages and
reference.
Finally, adjust the TX POWER to the desired power level.

4.2 The Front Panel

The AMT-70 can be fitted with one of three front panels: a basic indicator-only version typically used
with the “in the field” units (network downstream) where the units are managed through the network
management facilities; a more advanced front panel which additionally includes a keypad and an LCD
that allows the customer to configure and control the modem directly, and a special active front panel
with a keypad and LCD for the AMT-73L modem.
The interface supports the same command set used to configure the modem via the other M&C
interfaces.

4.2.1 Panel Indicators

All AMT-70 front panels include a series of LED indicators. The LEDs indicate critical system status
information as illustrated in the previous are described below. LEDs that illuminate GREEN indicate
that the function is in operation. LEDs that illuminate RED indicate a fault condition.

66
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 11: The AMT-70 Front Panel

LED Status Description

BUC Power: Green Indicates that the BUC power is enabled
LNB Power: Green Indicates that the LNB power is enabled
Transmit On: Green Indicates that the modulator is transmitting.
RX 1 Fault: Red / Off Indicates that the demodulator channel 1 is not locked to a
received signal (if OFF the channel is locked).
RX 2 Fault: Red / Off Reserved
TX Fault: Red Indicates that the modulator is not transmitting, due to a fault
(or user intervention).
Prime Power Green Indicates that the power supply current is received by the
management card.

Figure 12: The AMT-73L Active Front Panel

Prime Power
Transmit On
Receive Lock
Receive Fault
Transmit Fault

67
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 13: The AMT-73L Front Panel LEDS

LED Status Description

Prime Power: Green Indicates that the power supply current is received by the
management card
Transmit On: Green Indicates that the modulator is transmitting.
Receive Lock Green Indicates that demodulator is locked to incoming signal
Receive Fault Red / Off Indicates that the demodulator is exhibiting a fault condition.
TX Fault: Red Indicates that the modulator is not transmitting, due to a fault
(or user intervention).

4.2.2 Keypad & Display

The advanced front panel adds a Vacuum Florescent Display and a numeric keypad. The screen can
display two lines of 40 characters each with a wide viewing angle. The keypad is comprised of 10
numeric keys [0-9], 4 arrow keys, an ENT (enter) key, and CLR (clear) key. The functions of the
keypad buttons are provided in Figure 14.
The front panel implements a system of seven (7) nested menus, displaying the available options and
parameters. The keypad allows the user to navigate through these menus to monitor and control the
AMT-70 modem by viewing and editing parameters as required.
The display has a blinking solid-block cursor that flashes over the current selected item. The sixteen
push buttons are used to navigate the menu system and to select or edit the required option or
parameter. Functional descriptions of each of the sixteen push buttons can be found in the table
below.

Button Function
RIGHT Moves the cursor to the right through designated fields.
Can also be used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD
display (and vice versa) by toggling to the right through fields.

LEFT Moves the cursor to the left through designated fields.

Can also be used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD
display (and vice versa) by toggling to the left through fields

UP Moves the cursor up through designated fields.

Primarily used to edit parameters such as L-Band Output frequency etc.
Can also be used to set a ‘+’ on the sign position for signed parameters
Can also be used for navigation from the bottom line to the top line of the VFD
display by toggling up through fields.
DOWN Moves the cursor down through designated fields.
Primarily used to edit parameters such as L-Band Output frequency etc. Can also
be used to set a ‘-’ on the sign position for signed parameters or can also be
used for navigation from the top line to the bottom line of the VFD display by
toggling down through fields.
ENT Used to navigate through the menu structure or to accept an edited parameter.

CLR Used to exit the current menu and return to the previous menu.

68
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Button Function
NUM Used to enter digit number ranging 0 to 9.
[0-9]

Figure 14: Keypad Buttons and their Usage.

4.2.3 Welcome Menu

The modem powers up showing a welcome screen displaying the product name of the modem and the
company name etc. An example of this is shown in the next figure. Pressing any key will move the
display to the main menu.
The Main menu is entered when any button on the keypad is depressed and released.

C o p y r i g h t ( C ) A d v a n t e c h A M T 2 0 0 4 - 2 0 0 5

A M T 7 0 S a t e l l i t e M o d e m R e a d y

4.2.4 Main Menu

The Main menu offers the option to enter the branch menus. A sample of main menu is shown in the
next figure. Hereinafter, only one sample will be given to describe the operation for each type of the
menu components.

S E L E C T :

T X RX I N T E RF A C E M O N I T O R F U N C

With the flashing block cursor highlighting the first character of the name of the currently selected
function on the menu, pressing the ENT (enter) key will take the user to the corresponding branch
menu display (see Paragraph 4.2.5 below). Pressing the CLR (clear) key will return the display to the
Main menu. By pressing the LEFT or RIGHT key, the cursor will move sequentially through the
remaining functions items listed in the main menu.
These 6 functions are labeled TX, RX, INTERFACE, TEST, MONITOR, and FUNC. The first 5
functions should be intuitively understood (TX for modulator functions, RX for demodulator functions,
and etc), whereas the latter (FUNC) will become more familiar by selecting the category and leafing
through the parameters. However, some parameter acronyms are not so intuitive, and will be
explained further in this Section of the manual.

4.2.5 Menu Tree Structure

The 6-function front-panel menu trees are shown over the next few pages. As illustrated, the
selections (tree branches) vary according to different enabled options. In fact, options available include
the Turbo Codec, Reed Solomon Codec or IESS308/309/310, DVB-DSNG, various speed grade
options, and various interface options. Depending on your modem configuration the menu tree items
can vary.

69
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The lines and arrows to the left (or right) of these figures indicate how to leaf through the menus merely
by using the UP, DOWN, LEFT, and RIGHT keys to position the blinking cursor over the first character
of the parameter, and then pressing ENT.

NOTE: At this time, by pressing ENT, no parameters have changed. The values shown are
what are currently being performed, or the last parameter entered in the Command Buffer (see
Paragraph 4.2.6).

For example, suppose you want to make a change in the transmit power output. The steps would be as
follows:

From the main menu, position the blinking cursor over the TX (only the first character will be
blinking)
Press ENT. This puts you into the first set of menus of the TX command list.
Arrow DOWN three (3) times. This will cause the blinking cursor to display the next set of TX
commands.
Arrow RIGHT once. This positions the blinking cursor over the P in POWER.
Press ENT. This positions the blinking cursor over the first character (+ or -) of the POWER
parameter.
Arrow UP or DOWN to change the sign.
Continue to change the total value, remembering that the range of 0 to -25 dB cannot be
exceeded.
If you want to implement (execute) the change, press ENT. If you don’t want to make the
change, press CLR. Pressing CLR again following ENT or CLR brings you back to the Main

NOTE:
If the option is a variable (contents can be changed) pressing the ENT key moves the blinking
cursor to the first character of that parameter. Characters can be changed at will, but will not be
executed unless the ENT key is depressed (and some functions require the use of the
RECONFIGURE field before the command is executed. See
If the selected option is a status function, the cursor does not blink on the first character of the
parameter, and therefore cannot be changed. It is for viewing only.
Menu.

70
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

4.2.5.1 TX Menu

The TX menu displays a submenu specifying the available Top-Level configurations for the Modulator.

T X
I E S S D V B T P C 4 K T P C 1 6 K O M 7 3

The mode selections are as follow;

IESS; This mode is the INTELSAT mode and supports two submodes;
308-309 and TCM (IESS 310 8PSK Trellis coded Modulation).
DVB: This mode supports the DVB specified DVB-S and DVB-DSNG standards.
TPC4K: This data mode supports the transmission in Turbo mode with a 4Kbit FEC Block size.
TPC16K: This data mode supports the transmission in Turbo mode with a 16Kbit FEC Block
size.
OM73: This scrambling mode is specific for military transmissions.

If, for instance, IEEE / 308-309 is selected the Transmit menu appears (discussed in more detail in the
next section). The INTELSAT mode is automatically configured by this selection (TCODE INTELSAT),
All the configuration parameters for the other configuration options (modulation, rate, …) are presented
specifically tailored for this top level selection. The current ACTIVE configuration is always highlighted
at this level.

4.2.5.1.1 The Transmit Menu

The TRANSMIT menu includes a set of displays that allow the setting of programmable modulator
commands. The first display, indicated as TX Menu 1, is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU
is placed over TX, and the ENTER key is depressed and released. Navigating between the (6) TX
Menus is accomplished using the ARROW UP and DOWN keys – requiring two strokes to change
between menus.
For instance, for the IESS / 308-309 selection the top menu is as follow;

3 08 CO DE = I NT E L S A T M O D U L A T O R = Q P S K
R A T E = 1 / 2 R S R A T E = O F F

The first field (CODE=INTELSAT) is read/only a preset for the selection. All other fields are read/write.
To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the
desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE
function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the
parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current
settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears.

71
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

4.2.5.1.2 Available settings and parameters

The general menu below shows all the options relative to all modes. Depending on the selected mode
some parameters may not be valid and hence will not be displayed as options.
Figure 15: Front Panel Display TX (transmit) Menu
TX Menu 1

T X : M O D= Q P S K C A R R . F R Q= 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H z
B P S K (Carrier Freq. from 950,000,000 to 2,000,000,000Hz – L Band IF)
O Q P S K Q (Carrier Freq. from 104 to 176 MHz – 140 MHz IF)
O Q P S K I (Carrier Freq. from 52 to 88 MHz – 70 MHz IF)
1 6 Q A M
8 P S K
a U N I T S = B P S D A T A = 0 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 b p s .
b
S P S (Data Rate from 32,000 to 150,000,000bps or sps)

TX Menu 2

T X : C O D E= N O N E P O W E R = - 1 5 d b m
O M 7 3 (Power from 0 to -25 dBm in 0.1 dB steps)
T P C 1 6 K
T P C 4 K
I N T E L S A T
D S N G
D V B S
a R A T E = 7 / 8 R S R A T E = O F F
b
5 / 6 1 2 6
3 / 4 2 1 9
2 / 3
1 / 2
1 9 / 2 0
8 / 9
3 / 5
2 / 5

TX Menu 3

72
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

T X : S G N = O N I N P U T = E X T E R N A L
O F F M P E G _ V I A _ E X T
I N T E R N A L _ P R B S
M P E G _ V I A _ A S I
a D I F F = O N V B R _ M P E G _ A S I
b
O F F

4.2.5.2 RX Menu

The RECEIVE menu includes displays that allow the setting of programmable demodulator commands.
The first display, indicated as RX Menu 1, is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU is placed
over RX, and the ENTER key is depressed and released. Navigating between the set of RX Menus is
accomplished using the ARROW UP and DOWN keys – requiring two strokes to change between
menus.

For instance, for the IESS / 308-309 selection the top menu is as follows;

3 08 CO DE = I NT E L S A T M O D U L A T O R = Q P S K
R A T E = 1 / 2 R S R A T E = O F F

The first field (CODE=INTELSAT) is read/only a preset for the selection. All other fields are read/write.
To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the
desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE
function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the
parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current
settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears.
To change a parameter, arrow to the parameter, hit ENT, then either ARROW UP or DOWN to the
desired value, and hit ENT again. Some parameters require the activation of the RECONFIGURE
function in TX Menu 6. To activate, ARROW DOWN to RECONFIGURE, hit ENT twice, and if the
parameter is accepted (within the range of settings as defined in Paragraph 4.2.6) the msg. of “Current
settings saved” appears. If it is not accepted, a msg. of “Parameter out of range” appears.

4.2.5.2.1 The available Settings and Parameters

The general RX menu below shows all the options relatives to all modes. Depending on the selected
mode some parameters may not be valid and hence will not be displayed as options.

73
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 16: Front Panel Display RX (transmit) Menu

RX Menu 1

R X : D E M O D= Q P S K C A R R . F R Q= 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H z
B P S K (Carrier Freq. from 950,000,000 to 2,000,000,000Hz – L Band IF)
O Q P S K (Carrier Freq. from 104 to 176 MHz – 140 MHz IF)
O Q P S K (Carrier Freq. from 52 to 88 MHz – 70 MHz IF)
1 6 Q A M
8 P S K
a U N I T S= B P S D A T A= 0 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 b p s .
b
S P S (Data Rate from 32,000 to 150,000,000bps or sps)

RX Menu 2

R X : C O D E= N O N E D E S C R A M= O N
O M 7 3 O F F
T P C 1 6 K
T P C 4 K
I N T E L S A T
D S N G
D V B S
a R A T E = 7 / 8 R S R A T E = O F F
b
5 / 6 1 2 6
3 / 4 2 1 9
2 / 3
1 / 2
1 9 / 2 0
8 / 9
3 / 5
2 / 5

RX Menu 3

R X : A L P H A= 0 . 2 5 S S I Z E= 0 0 1 4 1 0 H Z
0 . 3 5 (From 0 to 500,000 Hz)
a D I F F= O N S W E E P = 0 0 0 5 0 0 0 0 H z
b
O F F (From 0 to 20,000,000 Hz)

74
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RX Menu 4

R X : S P T R M . I N V= A U T O R A W . D A T A= O N
I N V E R T O F F
N O R M A L
a I NP UT = I NP UT 1 I N T E R L E A V E R = D E P T H 4
b
L O O P B A C K D E P T H 8
I N P U T 2

RX Menu 5

R X : R E F= I N T O F F S E T= + 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H z
E X T (Range = + or – 0 to 2,000,000,000 Hz)
a L N B . R E F= O F F S P T R M . F F T= O N
b
O N O F F
A U T O

RX Menu 7

T X : R E C O N F I G U R E= R E A D Y
C O N F I R M
a (RUNNING appears momentarily, followed by Current settings saved)
b

4.2.5.3 INTERFACE Menu

The INTERFACE menu branches into six submenus labeled MODE, TX, RX, BUFFER, LOOPBACK
and REV.The CARD sub menu provides a means for selecting one of the interface types available
within the modem. The TX and RX sub menus display the information rate of the modem, allow the
selection of the appropriate timing and allow the clock edge and data polarity to be configured. The
Interface menu is entered when the cursor in the MAIN MENU is placed over INTERFACE, and the
ENTER key is depressed and released. Selection of one of the sub menus is by using the ARROW
LEFT or RIGHT keys, then hitting ENT for the desired sub menu.

I N T E R F A C E :
M O D E T X R X B U F F E R L O O P B A C K R E V

The DATA RATE parameter in the INTERFACE TX and RX sub menus are updated when the DATA
rate parameters are changed in the TX and/or RX menus. It will exhibit the same data rate as was
entered when BPS is selected, and will exhibit the actual transmission rate if SPS is selected.

75
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

NOTE:
TRANSMITTING ALL ZEROS will cause a pure carrier to be transmitted if scrambling is
not enabled in Intelsat Modes.

Figure 17: Front Panel Display INTERFACE Menu.

INTERFACE Sub Menu

CARD Menu

C A R D M O D E = R S 5 3 0
H S S I
E T H E R N E T

TX Menu

T X : R A T E= 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 C L O C K I N G= I N T E R N A L
(Display only) R S 5 3 0 T F D
R X L O O P
E X T E R N A L
T T I N V = O N D A T A . I N V = O N
O F F O F F

RX Menu

R X : R A T E= 0 2 0 4 8 0 0 0 C L O C K I N G= D E M O D
(Display only) D T E _ T T
L O C A L

R T E D G E I N V= O F F D A T A . I N V= O N
O N O F F

BUFFER Menu

B U F F E R . M O D E= M A N U A L
A U T O

B U F F E R . D E P T H = 1 0 0 0 0 b y t e s (buffer size is up to 65,535 bytes)

B U F F E R. US A G E = 0 0 0 3 2

LOOPBACK Menu

76
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

L I N E . L O C A L = O N
O F F
L I N E . F A R = O N
O F F
S Y S T E M . L O C A L = O N
O F F
S Y S T E M . F A R = O N
O F F

RX Menu 2

REV S W . R E V = 1 . 2 x

4.2.5.4 MONITOR Menu

The MONITOR menu (Figure 18) branches into four submenus labeled SUMMARY, TX, RX and LOG.
Selection of one of the submenus is made by using the ARROW LEFT or RIGHT keys and hitting ENT
for the desired submenu. The SUMMARY is a single page summary of critical Modem parameters.
Figure 18: Front Panel Display MONITOR Menu
MONITOR Sub Menu

M O N I T O R :
SU M M A R Y T X R X L O G

The TX/RX the monitor menu implements the monitoring functions for the modulator / demodulator, a
periodic update (five seconds) is applied to the relevant statistical counters / status bits.

The LOG option implements the front-panel log file browsing function. When this option is selected, the
LCD is auto-refreshed if the browsing is set at the top of the log (just after the option is selected and a
new event occurs). While scrolling the log, searching for messages the auto-refresh is stopped and
restarted if the last messages on the LCD are the one at the top of the log.

TX Menu 1

C O D I N G : I N T E L S A T
(Displays the current Active coding type)
M O D U L A T I O N : Q P S K
(Displays the current Active Modulation)

TX Menu 2

77
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

C O D E . R A T E : 1 / 2
(Current Active FEC rate)
D A T A R A T E : 1 6 4 0 0 0 B P S
(Rate is per Tx data rate in BPS mode, Transmission Rate in SPS)

C A R R I E R . F R E Q U E N C Y : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H Z
(Current Active carrier frequency)
A L P H A : 0 . 3 5
(Current Active alpha setting)

X Menu 3

TX Menu 4

J I T T E R : 3 4 H Z
Measure of input jitter – should be less than 1000Hz
PO W E R : - 2 5 . 0 d B m
(Range is 0 to -25 dBm)

TX Menu 5

S P T R M . I N V : N O R M A L
I N V E R T E D
S Y M B O L . R A T E : 1 6 4 0 0 0 s p s
(Rate is Tx SYMBOL rate in BPS mode, Tx Rate in SPS)

TX Menu 6

I N P U T . S T R E A M : L O C K E D
(Locked means input is OK, unlocked means rate is wrong or clock is absent
FI R M W A R E . S T A T E : P R O G R A M M E D
(Should be programmed. This indicates the FPGA status of the modulator)

78
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RX Menu 1

D E C O D I N G : I N T E L S A T
(Displays the current Active coding type)
M O D U L A T I O N : Q P S K
(Displays the current Active Modulation)

RX Menu 2

C O D E . R A T E : 1 / 2
(Current Active FEC rate)
D A T A R A T E : 1 6 4 0 0 0 B P S
(Rate is per Tx data rate in BPS mode, Transmission Rate in SPS)

RX Menu 3

C A R R I E R . F R E Q U E N C Y : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 H Z
(Current Active carrier frequency)
A L P H A : 0 . 3 5
(Current Active alpha setting)

Rx Menu 4

S N R : 1 5 . 6 9 5 d B
(0 to 30 dB. Display moves left after first update)
E S T . B E R : < 5 . 0 e - 1 0
-3 10
Range is from >2 X 10 to <1 X 10- )

RX Menu 5

E B N O : 1 1 . 2 2 4 5 d B
(0 to 30 dB. Display moves left after first update)
B E R : u n l o c k e d
(0 to 30 dB – works when Mod is in PRBS test mode)

RX Menu 6

O F F S E T : - 0 0 0 0 2 0 0 0 0 0 H z
(+0 xxx xxx xxx Hz)
S P E C . I N V : N O R M A L
I N V E R T

79
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RX Menu 7

PO W E R . A G C : - 5 0 d B m
(+10 dB from -80 dBm to -20 dBm – AMT-70; to +10 dBm with AMT-73L)
T I M I N G . L O C K : O N
O F F (Status of symbol timing recovery)

RX Menu 8

R S . V I T E R B I . L O C K : O N
O F F (Status of RS Viterbi, if RS Viterbi used)
A G C . L O C K : O N
O F F (Status of digital AGC function)

RX Menu 9

C A R R I E R . L O C K : O N
O F F (Status of carrier recovery)
D E F R A M E R . L O C K : O N
O F F (Status of Turbo deframer – for turbo modes)

RX Menu 10

E X T . C O D I N G . L O C K : O N
O F F (Summary status of FEC Lock)
S I G N A L . A B O V E : O N
O F F (Indication of input level – AMT70 only)

Rx Menu 11

S I G NA L . BE L O W : O N
O F F (Indication of input level – AMT70 only)
FI R M W A R E . S T A T E : O N
O F F (Demodulator FPGA status)

RX Menu 12

A L L . S T A T E S . L O C K : O N
O F F (Summary Receive / demodulator alarm)
LN B P W R : O F F
O N (DC power applied to LNB – AMT70 only)

RX Menu 13

80
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

L N B T O N E : O F F
O N (Turns 10MHz tone on and off to LNB)
L N B V P : O F F
O N (Switches LNB power between 13V and 18v)

4.2.5.5 FUNCTION Menu

The FUNCTION menu (Figure 19) branches into five submenus labeled INFO, CONFIG, CONTROL,
TESTS and REBOOT.

F U N C :
I N F O C O N F I G C O N T R O L T E S T S R E B O O T

The INFO selection displays the modem hardware / software base configuration. The CONFIG allow
you to configure the modem with DEFAULT or user defined configurations. The CONTROL option is
used to configure ancillary modem hardware like interface ports and external units to the modem like
the BUC and LNB. The TEST option supports the loop-back tests, hardware control and statistical
counters RESET. The REBOOT implements thea software reboot.

4.2.5.5.1 The INFORMATION submenu

The INFOrmation menu displays the manufacturing information for the modem; the serial number the
maintenance software version currently in use in the modem, the RX and TX software versions, the
manufacturing date, manufacturing options fitted and the measured 12 VDC from the modem’s power
supply.

M O D E L : A M T 7 0
S E R I A L : M 0 0 1 2 3 4

4.2.5.5.2 The CONFIGURATION submenu

The CONFIGuration menu allows a series of modem configurations to be programmed and stored in
memory, then recalled whenever a particular configuration is called upon for use. These CONFIG
menus could be considered as the “station select” buttons on a car radio. The stations are pre-
programmed for local stations in the area, and then are selected to suit the listener’s format.
The DEFAULT command allows the original modem parameters to be recalled in the event memory
selection was temporary, or was incorrectly programmed.

81
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

D E F A U L T L O A D . C F G S T O R E . C O N

The default parameters are read/only and cannot be changed.

There are up to 10 memory locations that can be programmed, with each being able to store and
retrieve a complete set of parameters to include TX and RX carrier frequency, data rate, FEC type,
FEC code rate, type of scrambler, and etc.

L O A D . C F G :
C O N F I G UR A T I O N NO : C L E A R O R 1 T HR U 9

S T O R E . C F G :
C O N F I G UR A T I O N NO : C L E A R O R 1 T HR U 9

4.2.5.5.3 The CONTROL submenu

The CONTROL submenu is used to sets up the modem ports and peripherals.

C O N T R O L
P O R T S B U C L N B L C D

4.2.5.5.4 The CONTROL/PORTS/NETWORK option

The NETWORK menu sets up the IP address for the modem when using the 10/100BaseT Ethernet
M&C port. There are two sets of IP addresses; PRIMARY NIC (Network Interface Card) or
SECONDARY NIC. In normal use, only the PRIMARY NIC need be programmed, which is for the
modem. The SECONDARY NIC is only for the demodulator, and is used during factory testing.

Figure 19: Front Panel Display FUNC (function) Menu.

NETWORK Sub Menu

NET W O R K :
P R I M A R Y N I C S E C O N D A R Y N I C

NETWORK Menu 1

P R I M A D D R= 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 8
M A S K= 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0 0 0

NETWORK Menu 2

82
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

PR I M G A T E W A Y = 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 8

NETWORK Menu 3

S C N D A D D R= 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 7
M A S K= 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0 0 0

NETWORK Menu 4

SC N D G A T E W A Y = 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 2 5 4 . 2 3 7

4.2.5.5.5 The CONTROL/PORTS/RS485 option

The RS485 menu provides the means to setup the address of the modem’s RS-485 M&C port, plus
provides a means for setting the type of communication (packet or command mode), the baud rate, the
parity, the number of data bits, and the number of stop bits for the asynchronous data port. More
information about the two methods of communication is provided in subsequent sections of this
manual.

R S 4 8 5 A D R S= 0 0 5 D e c
(Addresses from 1-15)
C O N T R O L = n o n e
p a c k e t
c o m m a n d

RS485 Menu 2

R S 4 8 5 S P E E D= 0 0 4 8 0 0 P A R I T Y= N O N E
0 0 9 6 0 0 E V E N
0 1 9 2 0 0 O D D
0 3 8 4 0 0
0 5 7 2 0 0
1 1 5 2 0 0
D A T A B I T S = 8 S T O P B I T S = 1
7 2

83
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

4.2.5.5.6 The CONTROL/BUC submenu

The CONTROL/BUC submenu is used to sets up the BUC when this support is fitted on the modem.

B U C P O W E R = O F F
R E F E R E N C E = O F F

The BUC power can be turned ON/OFF from the front panel. The BUC is controlled by the modulator
card on the modem. If the BUC status is changed, an event is recorded to the log. The REFERENCE
option can be turn ON/OFF the 10Mhz clock reference.

4.2.5.5.7 The CONTROL/LNB submenu

The CONTROL/LNB submenu is used to set up the modem ports and peripherals.

L N B P O W E R = O F F R E F E R E N C E = O F F
T O N E= O F F P O L A R I S A T I O N= O F F

This option appears if a demodulator is fitted on the modem. The POWER option controls the LNB
power status. The REFERENCE controls if the 10Mhz reference clock is used. The TONE option set
the 22kHz tone ON/OFF. Finally, the POLARIZATION sets the LNB polarization.

4.2.5.5.8 The CONTROL/LCD submenu

The CONTROL/LCD submenu is used to configure the LCD brightness and support a basic screen
saver for the LCD.

L C D :
B R I G H N E S S S C R E E N _ S A V E R

The brightness setting is be set by selecting the option BRIGHNESS. The brightness level can be set
by using the numeric keys 1-8 or the up/down arrow keypad buttons.
The screen-saver is used to turn off the LCD. When [ENTER] is pressed the LCD is turned OFF.
Pressing any key after the LCD is turned off wake-up the LCD and restore the active state.

84
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

4.2.5.5.9 The TESTS submenu

The TEST menu branches into three submenus labeled MODE, LEDTEST and RESET.

T E S T :
M O D E L E D T E S T R E S E T

The MODE option

The MODE sub menu provides a means for generating a pure carrier from the modulator, and for
placing the modulator and demodulator into an IF loop-back.

M O D E CO NT I N UO US . W A V E = O F F
T X . L O O P B A C K = O F F

NOTE:
Activating Continuous Wave will cause the modulator to generate a pure carrier,
which will disrupt traffic, and may cause interference to satellite operations.

The LEDTEST option

The LEDTEST provides a means of testing the front panel LED indicators.
The RESET option

R E S E T :
T X S TA T S R X . S TA TS Reset the mod / demodulator
statistical counters

The RESET option is used to RESET the modulator / demodulator statistical counters.

4.2.5.5.10 The REBOOT option

Finally, the REBOOT option allows you to reboot the modem front-panel without disconnecting the
power cable from the back. Before to perform the operation the front-panel ask for a confirmation as
below.

R E B O O T
R e b oot t he m od e m ? [ E N T E R ] or [ C L E A R ]

4.2.6 Executing Variable Commands from the Front Panel

In some cases, when a parameter is changed (such as TX PWR , etc.) followed by ENTER, the
parameter is executed immediately. These are independent parameters, since changing their values
do not affect any other parameter in the menu.

85
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

However, there are certain command parameters in the TX and RX menus that are dependant on the
settings of other parameters, such as TX or RX UNITS , MODulation or DEMODulation, FEC CODE,
code RATE, RSRATE, and DATA rate, and therefore all of the parameters need to be checked and
changed if necessary. Executing these commands is performed using the RECONFIGURE =
READY/CONFIRM function in the TX and RX menus, respectively. Figure 20 below shows the valid
parameters.

NOTE:
TX and RX RECONFIGURE commands from the front panel are TRESET and RRESET in the
CLI mode (RS-232 or RS-485 interface).

Currently, TX and RX CARRIER FREQ also require that RECONFIGURE in the TX and RX menus to
be executed, but there are no restrictions for any of the FEC Types shown in the figure.

Figure 20: Acceptable Parameters for FEC Type

FEC Type Code Reed Modulation Scrambler Diff Units Data Rate
Rate Solomon Coding
Viterbi, Intelsat4 ½, ¾, ⅞ 219 or 126 BPSK, QPSK, On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
OQPSK Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
Viterbi, Intelsat ⅔ Trellis 219 or 126 8PSK On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
Viterbi, DSNG ⅔, 5/6, Automatic – 8PSK Always On N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
8 204,188 Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
/9
Viterbi, DSNG ¾, ⅞ Automatic – 16QAM Always On N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
204,188 Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
Viterbi, DVBS2 ½, ⅔, Automatic – QPSK, OQPSK Always On N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
204,188 Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
¾, 5/6, ⅞
None2 Uncoded None BPSK, QPSK, On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
OQPSK, 8PSK, Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
16QAM
OM732 Uncoded, None BPSK, QPSK, On/Off On/Off SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
OQPSK Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
½, ¾
2
TPC16K2,5 /5, 3/5, None BPSK, QPSK, On/Off N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
8 OQPSK, 8PSK, Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
/9, 19/20 16QAM
TPC4K2 ¾ None BPSK, QPSK, On/Off N/A SPS/BPS Must be within Symbol
OQPSK, 8PSK, Rate of 32 ksps to 40 Msps
16QAM

ENTER the changed values from the TX or RX menu, then arrow down to the RECONFIGURE=
READY, press ENTER and then ENTER again to CONFIRM.

4 Offset QPSK is limited to 20MSymbols/Sec

5 Only 8/9 or 19/20 Code Rates make sense for 8PSK and 16QAM Modulation schemes.
86
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 5 MANAGING THE MODEM

It is recommended that Chapter 3 be reviewed to understand the operational features of this modem
prior to setting up the modem.

5.1 Using the RS-232 Port

Initial access to the modem is via a RS-232 asynchronous serial port that is available for the external
monitor and control of the modem functions. The input is a 9-pin female D connector (P7 for the AMT-
70 and J11 for the AMT-73L), on the rear panel.
To use the rear panel serial connector, attach an ASCII terminal to the D connector as labeled above.
The input data is applied to pin 3, and the output data is available at pin 2. A standard one-to-one
cable from the 9-pin COM port of a PC will provide the proper connection.
When you use HyperTerminal (Windows) or Minicom (Linux), the port configuration setup must be
as follows: 57600/N/8/1.

Note:
Some PCs do not respond well to the +5 VDC applied to pin 9
(refer to Paragraph 8.7 for pin-outs).

Since the RS-232 port is not addressable, it can be used

A User ID and Password is required for gaining access to the modem. From the factory, the User ID
and Password is set to:
Userid = root
Password = adminop
It is recommended that the password be changed upon delivery to protect the settings of the modem.
Follow the steps starting on Paragraph 5.4 for gaining access and controlling the modem, along with
setting up the RS-485 port address, speed, parity, number of data bits, and stop bits. Further in this
Chapter are also instructions for setting up the IP address and subnet mask of the two Ethernet ports.

5.2 Using RS-485 Rear Panel Remote M&C

A dual function RS-485 (P8 for the AMT-70 and J13 for the AMT-73) port is also present at the rear
panel. This port is set to 4-wire operation. For monitor and control over this port the mcadd command
must be used in order to define the tributary address of the modem. The RS-485 port can be
controlled by different protocols; ASCII, binary packet mode or BUC control.
Using the RS-485 port with the command or packet protocol allows a number of modems to be
controlled from a client PC. Each modem being controlled on the same bus must have a unique
address set. Refer to Chapter 8 of this document for further information and instructions for setting the
RS-485 addresses and modes. Refer to Paragraph 8.10 for pin-outs.

87
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.3 Using the Ethernet Port

The back panel Ethernet modem management port (P6 for the AMT-70 and J9 for the AMT-73L) is
used to interface the modem with the network. This port is dedicated to receive and process the
management requests. These requests come from a workstation and/or a management server station.
The modem network management is based on the TCP/IP protocol suite. The typical client applications
TELNET / FTP are used to manage the modem.

The M&C demod port (P7 for the AMT-70 and J10 for the AMT-73L) is used only for downloading the
firmware on the demodulator card.

Both ports support the dual speed 10/100 Mbps. At power on, the speed is negotiated between the
modem and the repeater/hub/router on your network. For setting the unit network / routing addresses,
the CLI commands tsetcfg /rsetcfg are used. They are discussed in more detail later on in this chapter.
The network setting can also be configured through the front-panel using the FUNC/NETWORK
(Figure 19) selection.

When connecting a PC Ethernet port directly to the modem (P6 or J9, as above), use a crossover
cable. Refer to Paragraph 0 for pin-outs of the 10/100 Ethernet ports.

5.4 Starting the Modem

When the modem is powered up, the following message appears on the terminal connected to the
back-panel serial interface (P6 or M&C Interface);

Coldfire Bootloader (Mar 19 2004 - 13:28:54)

CPU: MOTOROLA Coldfire MCF5272

Board: ADVANTECHAMT-70 Modems
DRAM: 16 MB
FLASH: 8 MB
Hit any key to stop autoboot: 0
## Booting image at ffc40000 ...
Image Name:
Data Size: 789214 Bytes = 770 kb = 0 MB
Load Address: 00040000
Entry Point: 00040000
Verifying Checksum ... OK
Uncompressing Kernel Image ... OK
Linux version 2.4.17-uc0 (root@lyvon) (gcc version 2.95.3 20010315 (release) (Coldfire patches 3
uClinux/COLDFIRE(m5272)

88
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

COLDFIRE port done by Greg Ungerer, [email protected]

Flat model support (C) 1998,1999 Kenneth Albanowski, D. Jeff Dionne
On node 0 total pages: 4096
……………….
M41T94 Real Time Clock Driver loaded
Resetting modulator/demodulator (LOW)
Command: powercyc 1
Initializing modulator/demodulator (HIGH)
……………..
DEMOD: Initialization in progress()
……
MOD: MOD_Init()
MODULATOR: Initialization in progress()
Command:
Execution Finished, Exiting …….

Figure 21: Booting the modem

5.5 Login to the modem

The logon to the AMT-70/73L modem from the serial port or Telnet in command line mode is described
below:

uClinux login: root

Password:
AMT-70 Modem Software - V1.0
Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved
AdvantechAMT 2002-2003, All Right Reserved
Shell invoked to run file: /sbin/msh.sh
Command: cd /sbin
Command: ./msh
AMT-70 Modem Control Shell
#

The default manufacturing login userid / password are:

Userid: root - Password: adminop

Figure 22: Login to the modem in Command Line Mode (CLI)

After the logon is completed, the prompt character # shall appear. At this point the modem shell is
active and allows you to configure and control the modem.

89
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.6 Setting the Security

We strongly recommend that the manufacturing installation password is changed during the first setup.
The command “passwd” is used for this function as shown below;

# passwd

Changing password for root

Enter the new password (minimum of 5, maximum of 8 characters) (yourpassword)
Please use a combination of upper and lower case letters and numbers.
Enter new password: (yourpassword)

Warning: weak password (continuing).

Re-enter new password:
Password changed.

Figure 23: Changing the Security Code (Password)

We strongly recommend keeping your equipment password in a safe place.

The system implements a strong password scheme to protect the modem from
network intrusion.

5.7 Setting the modem date and time

The ATM70 modem series have a standard real time clock fitted. This clock is battery back up and kept
the critical system parameters. The clock is also used by the modem software for the timestamp of the
log messages and SNMP trap alerts.

The command used to set the modem date and time is as follows:

# date yyyy.mm.dd-hh:mm:ss

yyyy is the year number

mm is the month number
dd is the day number
hh is the hour (24 hour system)
mm is the minute number
ss is the seconds number

90
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.8 Using the Modem Shell

5.8.1 Command Format

The syntax of the commands for the M&C interface is entered in line mode as follows:
# [command] [ parameters] ↵
All [commands] and [parameters] must be entered in lower-case. When [enter ↵] is pressed the
command is processed by the modem management processor or peripheral / option card for
processing.

5.8.1.1 Command Help

To get the list of the modulator / demodulator commands supported by your modem model you can
type:

# help all ↵
HELP: Display alphabetic list of commands:
MODEL: Display the modem model.
SERIAL: Display the modem serial number.
MDATE: Display the modem manufacturing date.
………..

Figure 24: Listing the modem command set

5.8.2 Commands Recall and Editing

The user interface supports commands recalls and editing;

↑ Recall the previous command

↓ Recall next command
← Shift left for command editing
Backspace Delete the previous character
Del Delete the current character
!! Execute previous command

Figure 25: Modem shell function keys

All the commands are kept in a wrap around buffer of 64 commands. Limited command editing is also
available through shift-left / shift-right operators.

91
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.8.2.1 Commands Completion Mode

All the commands must be entered using the command prefix, a "t" for the modulator and an "r" for the
demodulator. While typing a command you can use the (tab→) key to toggle the command completion
mode;

# t (→tab)
Possible completions are:
twelve tpn tserial tver …..
# ts (→tab)
Possible completions are:
tserial tsynth tspinv tscram
# tspinv
# tspinv ON (→tab)
# tspinv OFF (→tab)
# tspinv ? (→tab)

Figure 26: Using the command completion mode

The example as shown above depicts how the command completion mode is used. On the first line,
the ‘t’ character is typed followed by the tab character. The modem shell then display all the possible
completions for the command.
If another character is typed (“ts”) the list is restricted to the commands starting with the prefix “ts”. The
command completion mode also supports the completion of the possible parameters for the
commands. In the example, tspinv (→ tab) will suggest the parameters “ON” | “OFF” or ? (help). If the
second parameter is a numeric value, the lower value / higher value is suggested.

5.8.2.2 Command Completion Mode

rcarrier
# rcarrier 950000000
# rcarrier 2000000000
# rcarrier ?
Syntax Description:
RCARRIER frequency=[ 950000000 | 2000000000 | ? ] in Hz
Complete Description:
Define the input carrier frequency (70 MHz) or L-band in Hz depending on the RLBAND value. To
change the output frequency, enter the command followed by the desired 70 MHz or L-band input
frequency in Hz. The range of valid values for <frequency> is 950000000 to 2150000000 in 100 Hz
steps (L-band input signal) and 52000000 to 88000000 in 1 Hz steps (70MHz input signal).

Figure 27: Using the command completion mode (part #2)

Finally, the help option “?” give the complete description of the command syntax and complete
description.

92
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.8.3 Scheduling Periodic Commands

The user interface allows for the scheduling of commands at specific short interval of time.
The command every is used for this function:
# every [period] [explicit command] ↵
The [period] is the time interval used to define the periodic interval used to schedule the command.
The value can be between 2 - 60 seconds. The explicit command is defined as the command and
parameters.

# every 5 rber
=> every 5 rber
rber
RBER = UNLOCKED
=> rrber
rber
RBER = UNLOCKED
(CTRL-C)
Command scheduling stopped.

Figure 28: Scheduling monotonic commands

When the command is scheduled, the user interface is not available for scheduling other commands. In
order to stop the command scheduling, the character CTRL-C must be used to terminate the
command.
The format of the input lines are defined as follow;

[Command] Command to be executed

[Comment line] Start with “#”; all remaining characters are ignored.
[Space line] Ignored

5.9 Configuring the RS-485 Port

The RS-485 management port is on modem back panel at location P7 (AMT-70) or J13 (AMT-73L) cal
setup of this port is configured using the CLI command set below;
Figure 29: CLI Command Set for RS-485.
Command Description
mcadd [addr] Sets the M&C address of the RS485 port in client mode.
The range of valid addresses for is 000-255 for any protocol.
The address <000> means the RS-485 port is a non-addressable.
The addresses <001-255> must uniquely be set for each modem connected to the RS-485 bus.
Leading zeros are not required when entering the address.
mccontrol [option] MCCONTROL [ COMMAND | PACKET | NONE ]
mcspeed [value] Set the port speed; Valid values are 4800, 9600, 19200, 28800, 38400, 57600, 115200.
mcparity [parity] Sets the port parity; the values are ODD, EVEN, NONE
mcdatabit [data bits] Sets the number of data bits; the values are 7 or 8

93
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Command Description
mcstopbits [stop bits] Sets the number of stop bits; the values are 1 or 2.

These values can be set using the command line interface mode or the front-panel FUNC / RS-485
option. After setting the RS-485 port a controlling application must be assigned to this port. The
mccontrol command is discussed in Chapter 7.

5.10 Accessing the Modem through a Network

5.10.1 Configuring the network address

The modem network access can be configured by using the tsetcfg / rsetcfg commands.
The commands syntax is as follows;

# tsetcfg ipaddress aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd ↵

and
# tsetcfg netmask www.xxx.yyy.zzz ↵

Figure 30: Configuring the Tx Network Address

This command is used to configure the network address for the interface P6 (M&C mode for AMT-70)
or J9 (M&C mode for the AMT-73L). This is the main management interface for the modem. The Telnet
command line interface (CLI) is accessed through this interface. Telnet supports the same command
set than the RS232 CLI interface described in this manual.
A second interface specific to the demodulator (P1 for AMT-70, or J10 for the AMT-73L) can also be
configured with the following commands;

# rsetcfg ipaddress aaa.bbb.ccc.ddd↵

and
# rsetcfg netmask www.xxx.yyy.zzz↵

Figure 31: Configuring the Rx Network Address

This port is used exclusively for the demodulator firmware updates.
By default, at manufacturing time, the ports are set at the network address 192.169.1.132 / subnet
mask 255.255.255.0 for the main port P1 and 192.169.1.133 / subnet mask 255.255.255.0 for the port
P2.
Finally, as soon the network addresses are set, they are activated immediately. The modem does not
need to be rebooted for performing this function.

5.10.2 Configuring the routing tables

The default routing entry is also configured using the tsetcfg / rsetcfg commands:

94
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

# tsetcfg gateway fff.ggg.hhh.iiii↵ (for port P6)

and
# rsetcfg gateway fff.ggg.hhh.iiii↵ (for port P1)

Figure 32: Configuring the static routing tables

In summary, these addresses are typically used to define the routing address between a private local
area network and Internet.
Modem network address and routing definitions are network issues. Refer to your network
administrator for the assignment of your network node addresses, network mask and gateway
definitions.

5.10.3 Using Telnet for Remote Control

After the network information is configured, your modem can be accessed through an Ethernet /
Internet network. The remote login is as follows;

#telnet www.xxx.yyy.zzz
Trying www.xxx.yyy.zzz...
Connected to 192.168.1.192 (192.168.1.132).
Escape character is '^]'.
Login: [userid]
Password: [password]
AMT-70 Modem Software - V1.0
Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved
AdvantechAMT 2002-2003, All Rights Reserved
Shell invoked to run file: /sbin/msh.sh
Command: cd /sbin
Command: ./msh
AMT-70 Modem Control Shell
# tdata
#

Figure 33: Login using Telnet

When you set the terminal emulation on your client PC you must be set to ESC[~ mode or VT100 and
the cursor should be set to underscore mode (not block mode) .

After a session is established with the modem, theTelnet interface is identical to the serial port interface
and support the same command set.
The way to close a Telnet session is by using the “bye” command.

95
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.11 Using FTP for Software Download

The FTP Windows / UNIX version can be used to download the software upgrade from your
server/workstation to your upstream / downstream modems in the field.
A typical FTP session is as follow;

ftp www.xxx.yyy.zzz
Connected to www.xxx.yyy.zzz.
220-
220- AMT-70 Modem Software
220- Copyright (c) ADVANTECHAMT 1998-2004, All Rights Reserved
220- AdvantechAMT 2002-2004, All Right Reserved
220-
220 FTP Server (Version 1.0) ready
KERBEROS_V4 rejected as an authentication type
Name (192.168.1.132:root): root
331 Password required for root.
Password: adminop
230 User root logged in.
Remote system type is UNIX.
Using binary mode to transfer files.
ftp> bin
200 Type set to I
ftp> cd /sbin <= is the download R/W directory
250 CWD command successful
[ follow the instructions from the technical support team ]
ftp>

227 Entering passive mode 192,168,1,132,8,1

….
ftp> bye
221 Disconnecting, Goodbye.
]#

Figure 34: Downloading Software using FTP

The modem modulator software is updated from the back panel port P6 and the demodulator software
from the port P1. Follow the support group directive for upgrading the software.

96
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.11.1 Downloading from the RS-232 Serial Port

If Ethernet is not available (typically if the modem is in the field) the RS-232 serial port can be used for
software download using the Zmodem protocol. The Zmodem protocol sends data in 512 byte blocks
and uses cyclic redundancy checking to transmit and check the data. Uploading files from the modem
to the computer is allowed as well.

The computer's serial port should be configured for 19200/N/8/1. Any communication software that
allows the Zmodem protocol may be used. To get help for the wrapper program for the Zmodem
transfer, enter the following at the prompt:

# zdw -h
The help Response will be as follows:
-F filename
-f pass xon/xoff flow control to remote control
-j receive files by Zmodem protocol
-a use ASCII mode
-k send files by Zmodem protocol
DOWNLOADING FILES
Enter at the prompt, #zdw -j for a binary file, or #zdw -a -j for an ASCII file to download them. A
filename is not necessary since the file name has been selected at the computer and will be sent along
with the data.
UPLOADING FILES
Enter at the prompt, #adw -k -F filename for a binary file, or #adw -a -k -F filename for an ASCII file to
upload them. The computer should have already been set up to receive files.
TERMINATING THE UP/DOWN LOADING
To terminate the upload or download, the user enters CTRL-C and then CTRL-A. The termination may
be made at any time during the process.

97
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

5.12 Using SNMP

5.12.1 Introduction
The AMT70 modem family supports an SNMP agent. This support must be configured at
manufacturing when the modem is ordered. The command “showcfg” can be used to check if SNMP is
supported by your modem. If SNMP is fitted on your modem you can use the command “snmpcfg” to
configure the agent.

5.12.2 How to configure SNMP

The format of the command “snmpcfg” is as follow;

snmpcfg [Parameter] [ Value]

Parameter Values Description

syscontact [value] MIB-II syscontact;
The contact information for the administrator.
sysname [value] MIB-II sysname;
An administratively-assigned name for this managed node
syslocation [value] MIB-II syslocation;
Location of the modem unit
rocommunity [value] Community name for the GET requests.
At manufacturing the value is set to “public”.
rwcommunity [value] Community name for the SET requests.
At manufacturing the value is set to “private”.
authtrapenable 1/0 Enable / Disable the authentifications trap.
trapsink [network address] Destination Network Address (in the form ‘www.xxx.yyy.zzz’)
of the network manager. You can disable the sending of the
proprietary trap by setting this address to 0.0.0.0
trapcommunity [value] Community name for the traps requests.
At manufacturing the value is set to “public”.

The command “snmpconf” list the active SNMP configuration

Executing 'snmpconf.def'
> snmpcfg syscontact
syscontact = Head Office
=> snmpcfg sysname
sysname = Advantech
=> snmpcfg syslocation
syslocation = AdvantechAMT, Dorval, Canada
=> snmpcfg rocommunity
rocommunity = public
=> snmpcfg rwcommunity
rwcommunity = private

98
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

=> snmpcfg trapsink

trapsink = 0.0.0.0
=> snmpcfg trapcommunity
trapcommunity = public

5.12.3 The SNMP MIB source file

You can get the SNMP agent MIB source file using one of the two methods below;
1.- Through your sales representative.
2.- By uploading the file from your modem; upload the file “amt70_mibs.mib”
from the “/sbin” directory.

5.13 Modem events and logging

The modem can report unsolicited events (hardware or software) to the end-user through three
different mechanisms;
1.- The Serial Port master console interface
2.- The internal LOG file
3.- SNMP Traps
The following events are reported as follow;

Event Message Description LOG SNMP CONSOLE

Trap #
1 Startup Completed This event occurs after the modem is yes yes no
rebooted and the software is
initialized
2 BUC Power state The BUC power was turned ON yes yes no
3 The BUC power was turned OFF yes yes no
4 LNB Power state The LNB power was turned OFF yes yes no
5 The LNB power was turned ON yes yes no
6 Modulator output state The modulator output is DISABLED yes yes no
7 The modulator output is ENABLED yes yes no
8 Modulator TX state The modulator is READY to transmit yes yes no
The modulator is in FAULT state yes yes no
9 Demodulator lock state The demod is UNLOCK yes yes no
10 The demod is LOCK yes yes no
11 Shutting down This message appears just after the yes yes no
mod / demod software are resetted.

Figure 35: The modem log events

99
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Event Message Description LOG SNMP CONSOLE

#
12 Redundant Unit Fault yes yes yes

13 Switch Unreadable yes yes yes

14 System unknown state Refer to the section yes yes yes
15 Redundant UNIT ready “Redundancy” at page 131 for yes yes yes
16 Active unit fault the description of these events. yes yes yes
17 Both Unit Fault yes yes yes
18 Unit now active yes yes yes
19 This unit redundant yes yes yes

Figure 36: The redundancy system log events

5.13.1 The SNMP traps

The previous table defines which specifics traps are sent by the SNMP agent to the network manager.
For instance, if the command “BUCPOWER ON/OFF” is issued a message is recorded to the LOG file
and an SNMP trap specific (6,2) or (6,3) is sent to the configured destination network manager.

5.13.2 Using the log file

An internal log file is kept in order to record all the modem hardware / software events. This log is a
RAM file of 16k keeping the most recent alarms and events;

The format of a log entry is as follows;

[time stamp] [log message line]

The log can be browsed using the command;

# listlog ↵

When the terminal display is full, the message “—More—“ appears. You can press the bar “space” to
continue scrolling the log messages. You can also use the commands CTRL-S to stop the scrolling
and CTRL-Q to restart the scrolling on slow terminals.

100
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Alternatively, the log messages can be browsed on the front-panel using the option MONITOR/LOG.

If the LOG file needs to be kept the command;

# savelog ↵

can be used to save the log on flash.

Typically, the log is kept when you want to upload the file from the modem. Use FTP, set the directory
to “/sbin” directory in binary mode with the command “get logfile”. When the modem is shutting down+
with the command “reboot m” the logfile is automatically saved on flash and restored for the next
“reboot”.

Finally, the logfile can be cleared using the command;

# clearlog RESET ↵

while the modem is operational.

101
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 6 THE MODEM COMMAND SET

6.1 Introduction
This chapter describes the AMT-70 remote control, simplified user interface, set-up menu operation,
transmit control commands, receive control commands and monitor commands for both transmit and
receive.

6.1.1 The Command Syntax

The command syntax for the AMT-70 modems is as follows;
<command> [parms]
The <command> field specifies the command name for the specific card. Typically, all command
names for the demodulator are prefixed with “r”, all command for the modulator by “t” and for the
interface control “i”.
If only the command name is specified it means most of the time that it’s a query request. If the
command name is followed by the parm “??” it means it’s a help request.
The [parms] field is specific to each command. Typically one parameter is specified for the requests.
The figure below shows some example of the commands;
Figure 37: AMT70 command syntax

Examples
RBER Query the demodulator BER rate
TMOD 16QAM Set the modulator order to 16QAM
TRATE 2/3 Set to code rate to 2/3
RDATA ?? Get the help information for the command.

6.1.2 The Modulator/Demodulator Standard Commands

The figure below shows the command set that is common to the modulator and the demodulator.

Figure 38: AMT-70 Standard (L-Band or 70 MHz) Configurations

PARAMETER MODULATOR DEMODULATOR REMARKS

COMMAND COMMAND
Command Setting tunits runits Get/Set the units for the data rate. When the
BPS or SPS BPS or SPS data interface card is fitted on the modem
only the BPS unit can be used. If the card is
not installed and ASI input is used BPS or
SPS units can be specified.
Frequency (L-Band) tcarrier xxxxxxxxxx rcarrier xxxxxxxxxx Get/Set RF output or input frequency in Hz.
Frequency (70 tcarrier xxxxxxxx rcarrier xxxxxxxx Get/Set IF output or input frequency in Hz
MHz) (Optional)

102
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Data Rate tdata yyyyyy rdata yyyyyy Get/Set output or input data rate in Hz
Modulation Type tmod rdem Get / Set the modulator type
BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK, BPSK, QPSK, 8PSK,
16QAM, OQPSKI, 16QAM, OQPSKI
OQPSKQ OQPSKQ

FEC Code Type tcode rcode Get / Set FEC code type
INTELSAT INTELSAT Define the code type;
DVBS, DSNG, DVBS, DSNG, (note: the codes OM73 and NONE
DVBS2S, DVBS2N, TPC4K, TPC16K, are supported only on the DISA
TPC4K, TPC16K, or OM73, NONE compliant military modem AMT73)
OM73, NONE
Code Rate trate rrate Get / Set the FEC code rate;
1/2, 2/3, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 1/2, 2/3,3/4, 5/6, 7/8, The code rate 1/4, 1/3, 9/10 are also
2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 2/5, 3/5, 4/5, 8/9, 19/20, supported in DVB-S2B mode.
19/20, or UNCODED or UNCODED
Reed Solomon trsrate rrsrate Get / Set Reed Solomon code rate
Code Rate OFF, 210, 126 OFF, 210, or 126
Scrambler tscram rdesc Get / Set the scrambler ON or OFF
ON or OFF ON or OFF
Filter Alpha talpha ralpha Get / Set the Nyquist filter roll-off
0.25 – 0.35 (AMT70) 0.25 or 0.35
or
0.12 – 0.35 (AMT73L)
Spectral Invert tspinv rspinv Get/Set modulator or demodulator spectral
ON/OFF ON or OFF ON, OFF or AUTO inversion. If demodulator is set to AUTO, it
automatically senses incoming spectral
inversion and inverts if detected. Only inverts
the modulation eye pattern I and Q.
Input/Output tinput rinput Get/Set interface sources
Sources EXTERNAL, INPUT1, (Back panel Input / output ports or loopback)
MPEG_VIA_ASI, INPUT2,
MPEG_VIA_EXT LOOPBACK
or
INTERNAL_PRB
Differential tdiff rdiff Get/Set the differential encoder
Encoder/Decoder ON or OFF ON or OFF and decoder to ON or OFF
10 MHz Oscillator tfref rfref Get/Set the 10 MHz Reference
Reference ON or OFF ON or OFF ON or OFF; Applies the 10 MHz reference to
the BUC and/or LNB.
Turbo Scrambler ttpcs rtpcs Set the compatible Turbo mode
mode NORMAL or V35 NORMAL or V35 on the modulator / demodulator.
Reset Modem treset rreset Resets (activate) the modulator or
Software demodulator pending software parameters
Parameters

103
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

6.1.3 The Modulator Specific Commands

The modulator specific commands are listed below:

Figure 39: Monitor Specifics Commands

Modulator Specifics
Output Interface toutput Control output signal frequency
70, 140 or L BAND
PRBS Polynomial tprbs Get / Set PRBS Polynomial
18 23
2_23 : 1+x + x ,
17 23
2_20 : 1+x + x ,
14 17
2_17 : 1+x + x ,
14 15
2_15 : 1+x + x ,
5 6
2_6 : 1+x + x ,
18 23
2_23I : 1+x + x ,
17 23
2_20I : 1+x + x ,
14 17
2_17I : 1+x + x ,
14 15
2_15I : 1+x + x , or
5 6
2_6I : 1+x + x
(note I means inverted)
Signal Control tsignal Controls modulator output
ON or OFF
Output Level tlevel Set the output power in dBm (increment .1bDM)
-25.0 to 0.0
Continuous wave mode tcwt When OFF, modulator output is normal; when
OFF or ON ON, modulator outputs in CW mode for n
seconds
Loopback mode tloopback Enables/Disables the L-Band Loopback.
OFF or ON When the TX loopback mode is set implicitly the
receive loopback mode is also set
(rinput loopback).
Effective symbol rate tsym Get the effective symbol rate (in sym/s)
Input stage jitter tjitter Get the input stage jitter (Hz)
Hardware status tstatus Get the modulator status. The command tstatus
0 (Input Stage Lock) with no parameters returns the binary status.
1 (FPGA programmed) If the command is followed by the parameter
“details” the decoded status is displayed.
Ex:
Input stream status = LOCKED
FPGA status = PROGRAMMED

Pilot tone control tpilots Control if the pilots tone are used for the
OFF or ON DVB-S2S – DVB-S2N modes.
(for DVB-S2 special demod card)

104
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

6.1.4 The Demodulator Specific Commands

The demodulator specific commands are listed below:

Figure 40: Demodulator Specific Commands

Demodulator
Specifics
Received data output rcinv Configure the receive data output
ON or OFF
Frequency sweep search rsweep Get / Set frequency sweep search range
range 0 to 20000000 +/- Hz
Raw data over MPEG (DVB) rrmvmk Enable/Disable raw data over MPEG
ON or OFF
Frequency sweep search rssize Set/Set frequency search set size
step size 0..500000 +/- Hz
Spectral Analysis rspanl FFT assist On or OFF or AUTO
(FFT assist) ON or OFF or AUTO
Output select rinput Get / Set L-Band output select.
INPUT1, INPUT2 or LOOPBACK
LNB Power Control rlnbp Enable/Disable DC power ON6
ON or OFF
LNB 22 kHz tone rlnbto Enable/Disable LNB 22 kHz tone on
ON or OFF current output (see footnote 2)
LNB Vertical Polarization rlnbvp Enable/disable LNB vertical polarization
ON or OFF (see footnote 2)
Reset Statistics rststa Reset all statistics/status information.
Estimated Eb/NO rebno Get Estimated Eb/NO
Estimated BER reber Get Estimated BER rate
Frequency offset estimated roffset Received frequency offset for programmed
(Hz)
Estimated Receive power ragc Return the estimated received signal in
dBm
Tuner TX level signal rpower Show the measured RX level signal
(AMT73L only)
BER Test Lock rlock Indicates lock condition of BER test mode

6 This command is ignored if RINPUT is set to LOOPBACK.

105
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Demodulator
Specifics
Status information rstatus Get internal demodulator status
or information.
rstatus details
The command rstatus with no parameters
return the “hex”” status of the peripheral
card.

# rstatus
rstatus = 0x6004
#

the command “rstatus details” return

the decoded status of the card;

# rstatus details
Detailled RX Status (6000):
Timing lock = OFF
Reed Solomon / Viterbi = OFF
Digital AGC Lock = OFF
Carrier Recovery Lock = OFF
Deframing Lock = OFF
External Coding Lock = OFF
Signal Above Limit = NO
Signal Below Limit = YES
Firmware State = RUNNING
ALL lock state = NO
#

6.1.5 Getting the Chassis Configuration and Status

Commands that are not specific to the Transmitter (modulator) or Receiver (demodulator) can be
executed from the serial port on the rear panel. These commands are summarized in the following
sections.

6.1.6 The Monitor and Control Commands

The generic commands related to the chassis, front and back panel control are listed below.

Figure 41: Monitor Commands Summary

Command Description
General Commands
help Displays an alphabetical list of commands.
Parameters are ;
“??” for the summary
“all” for the list of commands
showcfg Display the complete modem configuration installed.
default Sets the modem to default configuration values.
model Displays the modem model.
serial Displays the serial number of the modem chassis.
options Display the internal code for the manufacturing options fitted

106
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Command Description
mods Display the number of modulators installed inside the chassis.
(Always 1 for the AMT70 series)
demods Display the number of demodulators installed inside the chassis.
The value can be 0 or 1 if a demod is fitted.
mdate Displays the modem manufacturing date.
date Displays the real time clock current date and time ;
To set the date and time, the format of the date is as follow;
date yyyy.mm.dd-hh:mm:ss

Configuration
Commands
rconf Display the demodulator configuration values.
tconf Display the modulator configuration values.
iconf Display the interface configuration values.

Software / Firmware
Version
lver Displays the operating system version
sver Displays the network management software version
tversion Display the modulator software version.
rversion Display the demodulator software version (if tfitted)

Ethernet Port
Commands
netconf Display the Ethernet ports configuration values.
tsetcfg Set the primary address of the Ethernet port address;
The parameters are;
tsetcfg ipaddress [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or
tsetcfg netmask [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or
tsetcfg gateway [www.xxx.yyy.zzz]
rsetcfg Set the secondary Ethernet port address;
The parameters are;
tsetcfg ipaddress [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or
tsetcfg netmask [www.xxx.yyy.zzz] or
tsetcfg gateway [www.xxx.yyy.zzz]

Log Commands
listlog List the log file
savelog Save the log file for software download
clearlog Purge the log file

Other Commands
uptime Shows the elapsed time since the last reset of the operating system
on the NMC card.
twelve Displays the power supply voltage measured on the +12 Volt supply.
This reading is accurate to approximately ±10%.
ledtests Perform LED tests on the front panel
bye Exit from the modem shell (Telnet mode)
reboot Reboot [ m | all ]
Reboot the modem; The option “m’ reset the management card and “ALL
reset all the modem cards. After a software upgrade always used the

107
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Command Description
option ALL.

6.1.7 The Interface Commands

6.1.7.1 ASI Interface Commands

The ASI interface is fitted on all AMT70 modem on the demodulator card. The TDATA / RDATA
commands control the data rate for this interface.

6.1.7.2 RS530 + 1*HSSI interface

The commands associated with the RS530+HSSI interface card are as follows:

Figure 42: RS530 + 1*HSSI Commands Summary

Interface
Commands
ifmode The modem supports two interface modes; RS485 or single HSSI.
For modems equipped with the router option, an extra mode is supported:
ETHERNET

NOTE: When changing mode (e.g. HSSI to RS-530), the Tx and Rx

data rates will default to 5 Mbps.

iftxclock Set the interface transmit clock mode.

The selections are; INTERNAL | EXTERNAL | RXLOOP | RS530TFD.
ifttinv Control the edge of data interface transmit clock signal that registers the data (TT).
This signal can be inverted for compatibility with some OEM equipments;
ON | OFF.
iftdinv Control the TX data inversion; ON | OFF.

ifrxclk Control the selection of RX data receive clock; LOCAL, DTE_TT or DEMOD
ifrtedgeinv Control the transmit clock inversion mode; ON | OFF
iftdinv Control the RX data inversion; ON | OFF

ifbufmode Control the Doppler buffer algorithm; in AUTO mode the buffer size is controlled
by internal algorithms. In MANUAL mode the buffer can be set statically.
ifbufsize Set the buffer size when the buffer mode MANUAL is selected.
ifbufmon Display the current Doppler buffer usage.
ifbufreset Reset (realign) the receive Doppler buffer on the card

ifloopmode Set the data interface loopback mode.

The selections are;
LINELOCAL, LINEFAR, SYSTEMLOCAL, SYSTEMFAR

On this interface the data rate are set by the TDATA / RDATA commands.

For more details about all these commands refer to the sections 6 at page 56.

108
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

6.1.7.3 3*HSSI Interface

With this interface installed, the aggregate data rates for all 3 channels are computed automatically.
Thus, it is not possible to change data rates using TDATA/RDATA commands.

Figure 43: 3*HSSI Commands Summary

Interface
Commands
hssi Used for setting HSSI channel data rates, clock inversion, enable/disable.
Specify:
[ @1 | @2 | @3 ] immediately after command for channels 1,2 or 3.
Data rate: [ TXRATE | RXRATE ] [ 0 - 52000000 ]
Clocking inversion: [ TCINV | RCINV ] [ ON | OFF ]
Enable / Disable channel: [ TXPORT | RXPORT ] [ ENABLE | DISABLE ]

Example commands:
hssi @1 rxrate Display HSSI channel 1 Rx data rate
hssi @3 tcinv Display HSSI channel 3 Tx clocking inversion
hssi @2 rxport Display HSSI channel 2 Rx Enable/disable
hssi @1 txrate 5000000Set HSSI channel 1 Tx data rate to 5000000 bps
hssi @2 rcinv on Switch HSSI channel 2 Rx clocking inversion on
hssi @3 txport disable Disable HSSI channel 3

ifloopmode Set / Read interface loopback mode(s).

Loopback points are: [ LINELOCAL | LINEFAR | SYSTEMLOCAL | SYSTEMFAR ]
Modes: [ ON | OFF ]
ifprbs Enable / Disable PRBS sequence generation.
Modes: [ ON | OFF ]
ifprbc Display PRBS Error counters.
[ @1 | @2 | @3 ] immediately after command for channels 1,2 or 3.
ifrperc Reset all PRBS Error counters.
[ CONFIRM ] for reset.
ifswrev Display interface firmware (FPGA) revision.

109
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

6.1.7.4 High-performance Gateway (AHPG)

Note: Modems equipped with this option will require additional configuration via the Router serial port
on the rear of the modem (Labelled CONSOLE). The interface is configured using standard Cisco
syntax. Please refer to Appendix D and accompanying documentation “ Advantech IP Gateway
Rev.1 ”, for complete command details
The modem commands associated with this interface card are as follows:

Figure 44: AHPG Router Commands Summary

Interface
Commands
ifmode The modem supports two interface modes; HSSI or ETHERNET
In HSSI mode, traffic is passed via the HD-50 (SCSI-style) connector.
In ETHERNET mode, traffic is via the RJ-45 (Ethernet) ports. Router configuration
Parameters are detailed in accompanying document “Advantech IP Gateway
R.1”

NOTE: When changing mode (e.g. HSSI to RS-530), the Tx and Rx

data rates will default to 5 Mbps.

iftxclock Set the interface transmit clock mode.

The selections are; INTERNAL | EXTERNAL | RXLOOP | RS530TFD.
ifttinv Control the edge of data interface transmit clock signal that registers the data (TT).
This signal can be inverted for compatibility with some OEM equipments;
ON | OFF.
iftdinv Control the TX data inversion; ON | OFF.

ifrxclk Control the selection of RX data receive clock; LOCAL, DTE_TT or DEMOD
ifrtedgeinv Control the transmit clock inversion mode; ON | OFF
iftdinv Control the RX data inversion; ON | OFF

ifbufmode Control the Doppler buffer algorithm; in AUTO mode the buffer size is controlled
by internal algorithms. In MANUAL mode the buffer can be set statically.
ifbufsize Set the buffer size when the buffer mode MANUAL is selected.
ifbufmon Display the current Doppler buffer usage.
ifbufreset Reset (realign) the receive Doppler buffer on the card

ifloopmode Set the data interface loopback mode.

The selections are;
LINELOCAL, LINEFAR, SYSTEMLOCAL, SYSTEMFAR

On this interface the data rate are set by the TDATA / RDATA commands.

110
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 7 USING THE RS-485 PORT

It is recommended that Chapter 3 and Chapter 5 be reviewed to understand the operational features of
this modem prior to setting up the modem.

7.1 The RS-485 Control Commands

The mccontrol command defines which network management application controls the port. The format of
the command MCCONTROL is as follows;

MCCONTROL [ COMMAND | PACKET | NONE ]

The MCCONTROL command parameters are as follows;

COMMAND: In this mode the modem “command” task controls the port. This ASCII protocol is
typically used by a PC to control multiple modems (up to 16) using an RS-485 bus cabling. This
legacy protocol used by the SL-2048™ product is still supported for upward compatibility. The
command mode is supported by all modem types. This protocol is described in Paragraph 7.2 .
PACKET: The packet protocol application controls the RS-485 port. This application is
described in Paragraph 7.3.
NONE: In this mode the RS-485 is unassigned to any control applications.
This is the default manufacturing mode.
The RS-485 port can be set up using either the active front panel (Chapter 4) or from the RS-232
interface (Chapter 5).

7.2 The Command Mode

The AMT-70 modem is upward compatible and still supports the “Addressing Mode” protocol that was
used by the SL-2048™ legacy modems.
With this protocol a client PC can send ASCII requests to one or more modems on an RS-485 bus
using character command mode.
To command a modem on the RS-485 bus, the command must be prefaced with the address 1-255,
then a SPACE. Leading zeros for the address are not required. For the request the address and
command is not be echoed back to the user. The return prompt after the message is received
indicates which modem replied.

EXAMPLE:
<address> <command>
Ex: 023 TBPSK ON
Returns:
AMT-70 023 ON

111
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The AMT-70 modem supports a fast binary protocol through the back-panel RS-485 interface used to
control the modem from a client application running on a master workstation.
The client station can be based on Windows or Linux. The modem acts as a server application and
executes the configuration/monitoring query from this station.
The client application can control the following components on the AMT-73L modem:
The modulator
The demodulator
The data interface card
The BUC/LNB units (not required for AMT-73L)

7.3 The Packet Protocol

The packet protocol allows a client application (typically running on a master PC) to control multiple
clients modems using a binary exchange protocol.
The master unit send the requests on a multi-drop RS-485 cable7 to the slave modems The master
modem always controls the transmit channel (TX) and the slave modems exchange the control of the
(RX) channel on the bus.
In a typical configuration, the master modem sends 10 bytes binary requests to one of several (slave)
modems on a network. These requests can gather information (GET request) or configure the slave
modems (SET requests). The tributary modems are referenced by a specific address. This address is
defined by the MCADD command. A maximum of 13 modems can be controlled by one master station.
When one of the tributary modems recognizes his address in the frame header, the request is
processed and it takes control of the RS-485 bus (RX side) for sending the response. The bus is after
frees up.
The master continues to poll alternatively (in round-robin mode) all slaves on the bus.
This packet mode is supported when customer specific applications are required. This mode is a
complement to the CLI (Serial / Telnet) and SNMP modes.

The detailed packet protocol specifications are documented in the reference manual;

AMT-70 Series; Packet Protocol Specification, AdvantechAMT 2005

These specifications describe in detail the protocol handshaking and the request/response binary
frame structure.

This document is available upon request from your customer support.

7 The RS485 pinout for the AMT70/73L modems is described at page 119.
112
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 8 CABLES AND PIN-OUTS

8.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements

The connector arrangements for the AMT-70L and AMT-73L are provided in the following figures.

P5 P8
P2 P3

P7 J5 J6
P4 P6
J1 J2 P1 J3

Figure 45: Back Panel Connectors for AMT-70

Back Panel Description Connector Type

Connector Name
J1 RF IN (2) Type F (female)
J2 RF IN (1) Type F (female)
J3 ASI OUTPUT BNC (female)
J4 EXT REF BNC (female) (Optional)
J5 ASI INPUT BNC (female)
J6 MOD RF OUT Type N (female)
P1 DEMOD ETHERNET RJ-45
P2 RS-530 25-Pin D
P3 HSSI Subminiature 50-Pin male
P4 REDUNDANCY 15-PinD
P5 ALARMS 15-PinD
P6 MOD/DEMOD RJ-45
ETHERNET
P7 RS-232 (M&C) 9-PinD
P8 RS-485 (M&C) 9-PinD

Figure 46: Back Panel Connectors for AMT-73L

113
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RS-422/449 HSSI
RS-485 L Band
Data Data Alarms M&C Output
Interface Interface J6
AC J13 J1
J8 J18
Input

Mod/Demod RS-232
L Band Demod Redundancy 10/100BaseT
Gnd J7 M&C
Input 10/100BaseT Ext CLK M&C
Lug J11
J2 M&C10 J14 J9
J10

Back Panel Description Connector Type

Connector Name
J1 L Band Output TNC (female)
J2 L Band Input TNC (female)
J3 AC Power In IEC-320
J6 Alarms 15 Pin D
J7 Redundancy 15 Pin D
J8 RIA/TIA 449/422 37 Pin D
J9 Demodulator Ethernet M&C RJ-45
J10 Mod/Demod Ethernet M&C RJ-45
J11 RS-232 M&C DB-9 (female)
J13 RS-485 M&C DB-9 (female)
J14 External Clock BNC (female)
J18 HSSI Subminiature 50-Pin male

8.2 RS-442/449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable

Using an AMT-70 with devices that have an RS-422/RS-449 interface (such as a BER tester)
requires an adapter cable. Although the RS-530 and RS-422/RS-449 interfaces are electrically
identical, they have different connectors.
Use a cable with the pin-outs as listed in the figure below;

Figure 47: TS-422/RS-449 to RS-530 Adapter Cable Pin-Out

RS-422/RS-449 RS-422/RS-449
Source RS-530 Pin
Pin Signal
P1-17 TT-A DTE P2-24
P1-35 TT-B DTE P2-11
P1-4 SD-A DTE P2-2
P1-22 SD-B DTE P2-14

114
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RS-422/RS-449 RS-422/RS-449
Source RS-530 Pin
Pin Signal
P1-5 ST-A DCE P2-15
P1-23 ST-B DCE P2-12
P1-7 RS-A DTE P2-4
P1-25 RS-B DTE P2-19
P1-9 CS-A DCE P2-5
P1-27 CS-B DCE P2-13
P1-1 Shield P2-1
P1-19 Signal Ground P2-7
P1-13 RR-A DCE P2-8
P1-31 RR-B DCE P2-10
P1-11 DM-A DCE P2-6
P1-29 DM-B DCE P2-22
P1-6 RD-A DCE P2-3
P1-24 RD-B DCE P2-16
P1-8 RT-A DCE P2-17
P1-26 RT-B DCE P2-9

Notes: P1 is a male DB-37 connector

P2 is a male DB-25 connector.
Wire A/B pairs use # 28 AWG twisted pair.

8.3 RS-422/449 to RS-530 Y-Cable

If a Y-type cable is required to go from RS-422/RS-449 to RS-530, use the pin-outs listed in the figure
below.
Figure 48: RS-422/RS-449 to RS-530 Y-Cable Pin-Outs

RS-422/RS-449 RS-422/RS-449
Source RS-530 Pin
Pin Signal
P1-17 TT-A DTE P2-24
P1-35 TT-B DTE P2-11
P1-4 SD-A DTE P2-2
P1-22 SD-B DTE P2-14
P1-5 ST-A DCE P2-15
P1-23 ST-B DCE P2-12
P1-7 RS-A DTE P2-4
P1-25 RS-B DTE P2-19
P1-9 CS-A DCE P2-5
P1-27 CS-B DCE P2-13
P1-1 Shield P2-1
P1-1 Shield P3-1
P1-19 Signal Ground P2-7
P1-19 Signal Ground P3-7
P1-13 RR-A DCE P3-8
P1-31 RR-B DCE P3-10
P1-11 DM-A DCE P3-6
P1-29 DM-B DCE P3-22
P1-6 RD-A DCE P3-3
P1-24 RD-B DCE P3-16

115
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

RS-422/RS-449 RS-422/RS-449
Source RS-530 Pin
Pin Signal
P1-8 RT-A DCE P3-17
P1-26 RT-B DCE P3-9

Notes:
P1 is a male DB-37 connector that connects to the BERT.
P2 is a male DB-25 connector that connects to the Modulator.
P3 is a male DB-25 connector that connects to the Demodulator.
Wire A/B pairs using # 28 AWG twisted pair.

8.4 RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs (AMT-70)

The 25-pin D connector (labeled P2 of the AMT-70) TX/RX DATA RS-530 on the rear panel has the
pin-outs listed in the figure below.

Figure 49: RS-530 Data Interface Pin-Outs

DB-25 Pin RS-530

Number
Common Name Description DIRECTION
Name
Pin 2 BA-A TD-A Transmit Data (A) To Modem
Pin 14 BA-B TD-B Transmit Data (B) To Modem
Pin 24 DA-A SCTE-A Transmit Signal Element Timing DTE (A) To Modem
Pin 11 DA-B SCTE-B Transmit Signal Element Timing DTE (B) To Modem
Pin 15 DB-A SCT-A Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE (A) From Modem
Pin 12 DB-B SCT-B Transmit Signal Element Timing DCE (B) From Modem
Pin 5 CB-A CTS-A Clear to Send (A) From Modem
Pin 13 CB-B CTS-B Clear to Send (B) From Modem
Pin 4 CA-A RTS-A Request to Send (A) To Modem
Pin 19 CA-B RTS-B Request to Send (B) To Modem
Pin 3 BB-A RD-A Receive Data (A) From Modem
Pin 16 BB-B RD-B Receive Data (B) From Modem
Pin 17 DD-A RT-A Received Signal Element Timing DCE (A) From Modem
Pin 9 DD-B RT-B Received Signal Element Timing DCE (B) From Modem
Pin 6 CC-A DCE Ready-A DCE Ready-A From Modem
Pin 22 CC-B DCE Ready-B DCE Ready-B From Modem
Pin 8 CF-A RLSD-A Received Line Signal Detect (A) From Modem
Pin 10 CF-B RLSD-B Received Line Signal Detect (B) From Modem
Pin 7 GND GND GND
Pin 25 TM -12 V Test Mode From Modem
Pin 1 SHIELD SHIELD GND From Modem

116
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.5 HSSI Connector Pin-Outs

The HSSI cable pin-outs (P3 on AMT-70 and J18 on the AMT-73L) are as follows;

Figure 50: HSSI Data Interface Pin-Outs

Pin # Pin # Direction

(+ side) (- side) DTE-DCE Signal Name
1 26 SC --- Signal common
2 27 RT <-. Receive Timing
3 28 DSR <-. DCE Available
4 29 RD <-. Receive Data
5 30 LC <-. Loopback Circuit C
6 31 ST <- Transmit Signal Element Timing
7 32 SC --- Signal Ground
8 33 DTR .-> DTE Ready
9 34 TT .-> Transmit Signal Element Timing
10 35 LA .-> Loopback Circuit A
11 36 SD .-> Send Data
12 37 LB .-> Loopback Circuit B
13 38 SG --- Signal Ground
14-18 39-43 .-> 5 Ancillary to DCE
19 44 SG --- Signal Ground
20-23 45-48 4 Ancillary from DCE
24 49 Test Mode

8.6 RJ-45 Ethernet M&C Connector Pin-Outs

The 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C connection utilizes a RJ-45 connector, as shown in the following
figure, which also depicts the arrangement of the pins, looking into the connector. There are two
Ethernet connectors, one for the demodulator only (P1 on the AMT-70 and J10 on the AMT-73L)
and one for the modulator and demodulator (P6 on the AMT-70 and J9 on the AMT-73L).
Use of the demodulator only Ethernet port is intended for factory testing and updating demodulator
software changes. The modulator and demodulator Ethernet port should be used for
communications with the modem during normal usage.

Figure 51: Ethernet RJ-45 Connector Pin-Outs

RJ-45 Pin Number Description Wire Color Codes Crossover Cable Pins
1 TX + White w/Orange 3
2 TX - Orange 6
3 RX + White w/Green 1
4 Blue
5 White w/Blue
6 RX - Green 2
7 White w/Brown
8 Brown

117
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.7 RJ-45 Ethernet IP Router Connector Pin-Outs (AMT-73L)

AMT-70 Modems may be optionally supplied with an IP router, Dual-port IP router (HPIP), FRAD
(Frame Relay Access Device) and bridge. With this option, an external router is not required.
For units equipped with IP data routing via a single port, an RJ-45 connector (JB) on the rear panel
provides access to the Ethernet data port. The pinout for JB is detailed in section 0 and Figure 51.
For units equipped with the HPIP dual port IP router, RJ-45 connectors ETH0 and ETH1 on the rear
panel provides this access. The pinout for these ports is identical and also detailed in section 0 and
Figure 51.

8.8 RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs

The figure below lists the pin-outs of the 9-pin D connector (labeled P7 on the AMT-70, J11 on the
AMT-73L):
Figure 52: RS-232 Connector Pin-Outs

DB-9 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 Not Used
Pin 2 Tx Data
Pin 3 Rx Data
Pin 4 Not Used
Pin 5 Ground
Pin 6 Not Used
Pin 7 Not Used
Pin 8 Not Used
Pin 9 +5 VDC @ 100 mA

Note:
Some PCs do not respond well to the +5 VDC applied to pin 9.

8.9 RS-232 Null Modem Cable Assembly

The figure below lists the pin-outs of a cable assembly that can connect the AMT-70 M&C port to
another RS232 DCE port. The loopback handshaking listed is not required for the AMT-70 modem,
but may be required for the other port.
Figure 53: RS-232 Null Modem Connector Pin-Outs
DB-9 Pin Number Description AMT-70 Pin Number
Pin 1 RLSD to Pin 4 and 6
Pin 2 TX/RX Data Pin 3
Pin 3 RX/TX Data Pin 2
Pin 4 DTR to Pin 1 and 6
Pin 5 Ground Pin 5
Pin 6 DSR to Pin 1 and 4
Pin 7 RTS to Pin 8
Pin 8 CTS to Pin 7
Pin 9 Not Used

118
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.10 RS-485 Connector Pin-Outs

The figure below, lists the pin-outs of the 9-pin D connector (P8 for AMT-70; J13 for AMT-73L):
Figure 54: RS-485 Connectors Pin-Outs
DB-9 Pin AMT70 AMT73L
Number
Pin 1 Signal Ground RS-485 TX +
Pin 2 Power Detector - Signal Ground
Pin 3 Not Used Signal Ground
Pin 4 RS-485 TX - Signal Ground
Pin 5 RS-485 TX + Signal Ground
Pin 6 Power detector + RS-485 TX -
Pin 7 Not Used Signal Ground
Pin 8*** RS-485 RX + RS-485 RX +
Pin 9*** RS-485 RX - RS-485 RX -

*** For AMT70/73L Pins 8 and 9 are for 2-wire operation. Pins 4, 5, 8, and 9 are for 4-wire
operation.

8.11 EIA/TIA-449 AMT-73L Connector Pin-Outs

The figure below, lists the pin-outs of the 37-pin D connector (labeled J8 on AMT-73L) on the rear
panel.
Figure 55: EIA/TIA-449 Connector Pin-Outs
PIN NUMBER SIGNAL NAME COMMENT ( Signal Direction )
4 SD A Send Data + to DCE ( Modem )
22 SD B Send Data - to DCE ( Modem )
6 RD A Receive Data + from Modem
24 RD B Receive Data - from Modem
7 RTS A Request To Send + to Modem
25 RTS B Request To Send - to Modem
9 CTS A Clear To Send + from Modem
27 CTS B Clear To Send - from Modem
11 DSR A DSR + means ( from ) Modem is Ready
29 DSR B DSR - means ( from ) Modem is Ready
12 DTR A Data Term Ready + to Modem
30 DTR B Data Term Ready - to Modem
13 Recvd Line Signal Det From Simple Interface
31 Recvd Line Signal Det From Simple Interface
17 TT A Transmit Timing + from Terminal to Modem
35 TT B Transmit Timing - from Terminal to Modem
5 ST A Send Timing + from Modem to Terminal
23 ST B Send Timing - from Modem to Terminal
8 RT A Receive Timing + from Modem to Terminal
26 RT B Receive Timing - from Modem to Terminal
10 LL Local LoopBack from Terminal to Modem
1 GND ( Shield ) Shield is connect to Chassis GND
19 GND ( Shield ) Shield is connect to Chassis GND
37 SC Send Common
20 RC Receive Common
33 SQ Signal Quality

119
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

PIN NUMBER SIGNAL NAME COMMENT ( Signal Direction )

16 SR Signal Freq Select
2 SI Signal Rate Indicator
32 SS Select Standby
36 SB Standby Indicator
15 IC Ring Indicator
16 SF Select Transmit Freq
14 RL Remote LoopBack
18 TM Test Indicator

8.12 RJ-45 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-73L)

For units equipped with IP data routing, located at Port JA on the rear of the modem is an RJ-45
connector carrying RS-232 electrical signals. This port is used for controlling the router. The RJ-45
connector diagram is shown in Figure 51. The wiring is specified below. For more information
regarding control of the router, please refer to the router manual titled ‘Communication Processor’.

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

1 CTS
2 DTR
3 TxD
4 GND
5 GND
6 RxD
7 DSR
8 RTS

8.13 Front panel RJ-11 RS232 Pin-Out (AMT-70/75)

Units equipped with 3 x HSSI ports and certain units equipped with IP data ports do not have a rear
RS-232 M&C connection. Instead, this connection is routed to a front panel RJ-11 socket. The pinout
for the socket is shown in the following table.

RJ-11 Pin Number Description

1 GND
2 RX
3 TX
4 --
5 COM
6 +5V

120
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.14 Front panel RJ-11 to PC 9-pin RS-232 Adapter cable

For units equipped with the front panel RJ-11 port are shipped with a 6 foot RJ-11 to RS-232 adapter
cable, Advantech Part # 26A-300MCU-601. The cable pinout is shown in the following table.

RJ-11 Pin Description *RS-232 pin

1 GND 5
2 RX 3
3 TX 2
4 -- 6
5 COM 1
6 +5V 9

* All other RS-232 pins not described are No Connect.

8.15 SSPB/Modem Cabling Requirements

The table below describes the cable assembly necessary to establish communications from the
AMT-70 modem and the AdvantechAMT SSPBs (BUC). The 9-pin D connector is a male and is not
supplied. The 17-pin circular connector is a female and is supplied with the SSPBs.

Figure 56: Cable pin-outs between AMT-70 and AdvantechAMT C & Ku band
9 PIN D CONNECTOR 17 PIN CIRCULAR CONNECTOR SIGNAL DESCRIPTION
Pin 1 Pin M Signal Ground
Pin 8 Pin D RS485 (+)
Pin 9 Pin C RS485 (-)

121
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.16 Alarms Connector Description

The modem provides 3 Form-C contact (relay) outputs for FAULT indication on the Modulator board
which includes a FAULT from the Demodulator board (P5 - AMT-70, J6 - AMT-73L). One alarm
relay set is undefined. The provided signals are as follows:

Figure 57: Pin-outs for alarm connector

Pin No. SIGNAL DESCRIPTION

1 (Undefined) Relay 1 NO
2 (Undefined) Relay 1 NC
3 Demodulator Fault Common
4 Modulator Fault NO
5 Modulator Fault NC
6-8 N/C (not connected)
9 (Undefined) Relay 1 Common
10 Demodulator Fault NO
11 Demodulator Fault NC
12 Modulator Fault Common
13-15 N/C (not connected)

The Modulator alarm will activate for the following conditions:

• AC Power Fail
• ASI Input Failure due to;
o ASI signal not present
o MPEG Sync Marks not correct
o ASI frequency outside +500ppm tolerance
The Demodulator alarm will activate for the following conditions:
• Demodulator lost of any Timing, Carrier, or FEC Lock
• Demodulator communications not responding

8.17 L-Band Transmit Cable

The recommended cable used to connect the modulator output to the BUC is available from Times
Microwave Systems. The part number of the bulk cable is LMR-600DB. The assembly number of a
finished cable is AE50520-XXX where XXX specifies the cable length in feet. This cable has male
type-N connectors at each end. The cable and its connectors have an impedance of 50 Ω.

8.18 L-Band Receive Cable

There are many types of coaxial cables that can be used to connect the LNB/BDC to the
demodulator input. The appropriate cable is dependent on many factors, including the gain in the
LNB and BDC/LNA, and the distance between the LNB or BDC and the input to the demodulator.
The cable and its connectors should have impedance of 75 Ω. One such cable is the 5916 or 5916R
cable supplied by CommScope. It is an RG11 type cable that has an RF loss of 4.4 dB @ 950 MHz
and 6.33 dB @ 2150 MHz per 100 ft, and a DC resistance of 1.5 Ω per 100 ft. Connectors for this
cable are available from Gilbert Engineering.

122
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

8.19 DB15 – DB15 – Switch Cable

The following connection information is provided for reference purposes.

Figure 58: DB15-DB15-Redundancy Switch Adapter Cable Pin-Outs

DB15 (A) DB15 (B) RF SWITCH Note
1 2 AV1 RF SW Drive, unit A
2 1 AV2 RF SW Drive, unit B
3 3 COM Signal Ground
6 14 -- Future Use
7 13 -- Future Use
8 15 -- B --> A Redundancy
9 9 +C RF SW +12V
11 12 1 RF Relay O/P NC
12 11 2 RF Relay O/P NO
13 7 -- Future Use
14 6 -- Future Use
15 8 -- A --> B Redundancy

123
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 9 TURBO CODING DETAILS

A basic understanding in Turbo Product Coding is followed by the specific AMT-70 Turbo Product
Code details.

9.1 Turbo Product Code Overview

CRC Scrambler TPC Framer

Insert Encoder

When data is encoded using Turbo Product Codes, it passes through four stages. First, a cyclic
redundancy check-word (CRC) is inserted into the uncoded data. This is then scrambled and then
Turbo encoded. Finally, framing marks are inserted into the coded data to enable decoding.
Turbo Product Codes are either two- or three-dimensional codes. Blocks of data are formed into 2D
or 3D arrays. The raw data is then encoded in each axis, using the basic Hamming or Parity codes.

57 bits
In this case, a 2D code is being applied,
so the uncoded data is formed into a
Uncoded Data
square 2D array. In this case, the array
of uncoded data is 57 x 57 = 3249 bits in
size.

57 bits
The component code is then applied first
ECC Bits

over one axis. This adds 7 error Uncoded Data

correction-coding (ECC) bits to each row
of data.

64 bits

124
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The second axis is now encoded using

the appropriate component code Note Uncoded Data

ECC Bits
that the ECC bits generated by the first
encoding pass are in turn protected. This

64 bits
results in an encoded block of 64 x 64 =
4096 bits.

The variety of available TPC codes is enormous: it is possible to use different component codes,
different coded block (array) sizes, to shorten the code by removing planes, rows, or individual bits,
and to apply an additional ‘enhanced’ coding pass. As a result, it is necessary to uniquely identify
the code. The convention for this is to describe each axis in terms of component code, uncoded and
coded block sizes.
So the code above can be uniquely described as:
eH(64, 57)eH(64, 57)
Where each axis (X, then Y) is an extended Hamming (eH) component code encoding 57 bits to
produce 64 bits.

9.2 AMT7X family TPC Overview

The AMT-7x family of products supports the following codes:
eH (32, 26) eH (32,26) eH (16,11) – This is a 3D code with a 16384-bit block size, made up
of three extended Hamming codes.
eH (64, 57) eH (64, 57) P (4,3) – Another 3D/16384-bit code. In this case, the Z-axis code is
a parity-only code.
eH (64, 57) eH (64, 56) – This is a 2D 4096-bit code. It differs from the example because it
is shortened in the Y-axis to enable enhanced coding.
eH (128, 120) eH (128, 119) – A 2D enhanced code as the previous, however with the
larger 16384 bit block size.
eH (128, 120) P (128, 126) – Similar to the previous code, however using a parity-only code
in the Y-axis.
And the following two compatible (Radyne / Comtech) codes are implemented
Rate ¾ - which is an exact 0.75 rate. It is a 4k bit block size and has no CRC
Rate 7/8 – an exact 0.875 rate. It is a 16k bit block size and has CRC.

9.2.1 CRCs and Scrambling

In all cases, a CRC is inserted into the uncoded data stream prior to encoding to determine the
presence of block errors after decode. The CRC word used is the CRC-32B algorithm. This
produces a 32-bit word that is inserted at the end of the uncoded data block.

125
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

In some cases, where the uncoded block size does not exactly line up on a byte-boundary, a
number of padding bits are inserted after the CRC. They are set to zero.
Once the CRC is inserted, the uncoded data is then always scrambled. This does not add or
remove data from the stream, merely exclusive-ORs it with a pseudo-random binary sequence that
can be removed in the decoder.

9.2.2 Framing
In order that the decoder can detect the start of an encoded data block, it is necessary to insert
framing marks around (and within) the encoded data. It is insufficient to simply mark the start of an
encoded block, given the large block sizes. Therefore, additional framing marks are inserted into the
encoded data at regular intervals to aid in this process. The start of frame marks is distinguished by
being the inverted form of the sync mark. The encoded 2D block looks thus:

ISM

Uncoded Data

ECC Bits
FSM

CRC
FSM

In this case, there are three evenly spaced sync marks per block, the first of which is inverted to
indicate the start of the frame.
For all codes, the sync mark is 8-bits long (with value 0xE2), with 128 bytes of encoded data
between them. The number of marks varies with the block size: for 16384 bit codes, the block
contains 16 marks (1 inverted); for the 4096-bit code, there are only four marks (1 inverted as
before).

9.2.3 Calculating the Code Rate

The code rate is the ratio of raw input data size (without CRC etc.) over the total encoded and
framed data size.
The total encoded data size in bits E is dependent on the block size and the
framing: E bits = TPCBlockSize + ( NumberOfSyncMarks × 8)

For 16k blocks, the basic block size is 16384 bits; to which must be added 16 bytes (128 bits) of
sync mark, making a total of 16512 bits.
For 4k blocks, the basic block size is 4096 bits with 4 bytes (32 bits) of sync mark, making a total of
4128 bits.
The unencoded data size is harder to calculate. First, the uncoded block size is calculated from the
product of uncoded elements of the code. Then, deduct 32 bits for the CRC. It is then necessary to
determine if any padding is required, since the raw data must be in bytes.

126
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The calculated uncoded size is thus reduced to the nearest multiple of 8.

⎛ ((U ×UY ×U z ) − 32) ⎞

Ubits = int⎜ X ⎟ ×8
⎝ 8 ⎠

In 2D cases, Uz is 1. The code rate is then determined as the ratio of the two values:

U
CodeRate =
E

For each of the supported code, the rates are:

Code Rate TPC Code Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 BER)
TX QPSK 8PSK 16QAM
eH(32, 26) eH(32,26) 0.44815891 TPC16K-2/5 2.4 dB
eH(16,11)
eH(64, 57) eH(64, 57) P(4,3) 0.58817829 TPC16K-3/5 2.9 dB 5.8
eH(128, 120) eH(128, 119) 0.86288760 TPC16K-8/9 4.2 dB 7.3 8.3
eH(128, 120) P(128, 126) 0.91375969 TPC16K-19/20 5.1 dB 8.6 9.6

Figure 59: eTPC Code Rates and Eb/No Values for AMT70 & 73

Code Rate TPC TPC Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 Max
Code Code RX BER) bitrate
TX QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Mb/S
eH(64, 57) eH(64, 57) P(4,3) 9715/16512 TPC16K- TPC70 3/5 12
3/5
eH(64,57)eH(63,56)+ 3160/4128 TPC 4K- TPC70 4/5 14
4/5
eH(128, 120) eH(128, 119) 14248/16512 TPC16K- TPC70 8/9 22
8/9
eH(128, 120) P(128, 126) 15088/16512 TPC16K- TPC70 26
19/20 19/20

Figure 60 : eTPC Code rates and Eb/No Values for AMT75

The code rate can then be used to calculate the transmitted symbol rate from the input bit rate (and
visa versa):
BitRatebits / s
CodeRate × Modulationbits / symbol =
BaudRatesymbols / s
The ratio of the raw data (base-band) bit rate and the transmitted symbol rate is the product of the
code rate and the modulation order in bits/symbol: BPSK has order 1; QPSK and Offset QPSK have
order 2; 8PSK has order 3 and 16QAM order 4.

127
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

9.3 3rd Party TPC Familes

rd
The follow ing eTPC rates have been interoperably tested w ith leading 3 Party
Modems.

Code Rate TPC Code TPC Code Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7
TX RX BER)
QPSK 8PSK 16QAM
(28,22)(32,26)(4,3) 12012/25168 NA TPC 16k 1/2
(64,57)(46,39) 2223/2964 TPC-4k 3/4 TPC-4k 3/4 3.9 dB 7.0 7.9
(128,120)(128,120) 14280/16320 TPC-16k 7/8 TPC-16k 7/8 4.2 dB 7.3 8.3
(64,63)(62,61)+ 3808/4032 NA TPC 4K 19/20

Figure 61 3rd Party eTPC code rates and Eb/No for AMT70

Code Rate TPC TPC Eb/No (10 Mbps data rate & 10-7 Max
Code Code RX BER) Bitrate
TX AMT75 QPSK 8PSK 16QAM Mb/S
(28,22)(32,26)(4,3) 12012/25168 N/A TPC600 1/2 10
(64,57)(46,39) 2223/2964 TPC4K- TPC600 3/4 13
3/4
(128,120)(128,120) 14280/16320 TPC 16K TPC600 7/8 29
7/8
(64,63)(62,61)+ 3808/4032 N/A TPC600 24
19/20

Figure 62 3rd Party eTPC code rates and Eb/No for AMT75

The method of scrambling can be either Synchronous or V35.

128
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 10 BUC AND ADVANTECH SSPB

The purpose of this chapter is to provide the procedures for operating the AMT-70 satellite modem
with the AdvantechAMT BUC and the AdvantechAMT SSPB. P

10.1 SSPB (BUC) Interface Connections

1. Connect BUC WR75 waveguide output to a suitable load. The Ortho Mode Transducer
(OMT) properly mounted to antenna or power attenuator will qualify as a suitable load.
2. Set the BUC power OFF using the command BUCPOWER OFF.
3. Connect AMT-70 (J6) to BUC (IFL) using low-loss 50-Ohm cable with type N (male)
connectors at each end. The cable loss must not exceed 12.5 dB at 2000 MHz. Cable
centre conductor DC resistance (end to end) must not exceed 0.5 Ω. For cable runs up to
100 meters, useLMR-600 or equivalent.
4. Connect AMT-70 (J5) to BUC (RS-485) using twisted pair cable.The connector supplied
with the AdvantechAMT SSPB is used at one end and a 9-pin male D connector at the
other.

10.2 LNB Interface Connections

1. Connect LNB WR75 waveguide input to OMT output.
2. Set the LNB power OFF using the command LNBPOWER OFF.
3. Connect LNB output to AMT-70 (J1) using low-loss 75-Ohm cable with type F (male)
connectors at each end. Cable loss must not exceed 25 dB at 2150 MHz.

10.3 RS-232 M&C Interface Connections

Connect M&C RS-232 (P8) interface to a PC with available RS-232 interface.

10.4 AMT-70 Modem Configuration

1. Refer to AMT-70 manual regarding the setting of the modulator parameters.
2. Use the following formula to determine the modulator IF frequency based from upon the
transmit frequency:
(BUC TX frequency) - (BUC LO 13.05 GHz) = Modulator IF carrier frequency.
Example for the desired TX frequency of 14.250 GHz:
14.250 - 13.050 = 1200 MHz.
3. Refer to AMT-70 manual regarding the setting of demodulator parameters.
4. Use the following formula to determine demodulator IF frequency based upon the receive
frequency from the satellite: RX frequency – LNB LO frequency = IF

129
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

10.5 TX Carrier Enable

1. Double-check modulator IF carrier frequency to insure proper TX frequency.
2. Determine desired TX output level from BUC.
3. Determine modulator output level based upon following formula:
(TX BUC dBm) – (IF to RF BUC gain dB)- (Cable Loss dB) = Modulator carrier
level.
Example: 4 Watts = +36 dBm, BUC gain = 56 dB, cable loss 6 dB.
36 dBm – 56 dB – 6 dB = -26 dBm
4. As in the above example, set modulator output level using
M&C command “TLEVEL -26”.
5. Double-check BUC output for proper termination.
6. Using M&C command “TREF ON”, to enable 10 MHz.
7. Set the AMT-70 BUC power to ON using the BUCPOWER ON command.

Figure 63: Test Diagram for SSPB and LNB

M&C Terminal Interface

RF Input
IBM Compatible

75 Ohm Coax 950 - 1450 MHz

Connectors Type F(female)
LNB
Caution: +24 or +48 VDC is present
on J1 center conductor. Use BUC RS-232 M&C
power switch (SW1) or DC block to Interface. Refer
prevent damage to test equipment. To SL-2048
Manual for Caution: +20 VDC is present on J5
Installation and center conductor. Use LNB power
Operation. switch (SW2) or DC block to prevent
damage to test equipment.

SW1 SW2
M&C RS-232
TX/RX DATA J2
J5 P1 RS-485 Connector
J1 RS-530
M&C RS485
AC Power (Provided)
BUC J3 LNB RF Output
PWR PWR

SL-2048 Rear Panel

SierraCom BUC Caution: RF Output
or Advantech must be properly
50 Ohm Coax 950 - 1450 MHz Refer to SL-2048 and BUC/SSPB
SSPB terminated to prevent
Connectors Type N(male) Manuals for Pin Assignments
damage to BUC/SSPB.

L Band Connector Do not use this

Figure D1. Test Diagram 1 Type N (female) LNB connector.

RX Carrier Acquisition

1. Set the LNB power to ON using the lnbpower ON command.

2. Use M&C command “rspinv to disable the receive Spectrum Invert feature.
3. Use M&C command “rsweep 32”, to enable demodulator sweep at +/- 32 kHz.
4. To check for carrier acquisition, use AMT-70 front panel RX Lock indicator to detect lock.

130
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 11 REDUNDANCY
The AMT-70 modem can be purchased with additional functionality that facilitates a one-for-one (1:1)
redundancy system. The redundancy feature is installed at manufacturing of the modem. This section
describes how to set up your hardware and configure the redundancy system to best suit your needs.

11.1 Hardware Installation

Your AMT-70 Redundancy kit is one of two variants: ASI (Asynchronous Serial Interface) or
combination RS-530 and HSSI (High Speed Serial Interface). The ASI kit ships with a redundnacy
bracket to be fitted near the rear of the modems, detailed in section 11.1.1. The RS-530/HSSI kit
ships with a larger 1U chassis to be fitted ideally below or between the 1:1 modem chassis. This is
detailed in section 11.1.2.

If you have the HSSI / RS-530 kit, skip to section 11.1.2.

11.1.1 ASI Interface

The redundancy hardware kit consists of the following:

Rack-mount bracket with RF splitter and switch pre-mounted;
2 x N-Type-to-SMA Cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-201)
2 x BNC-to-BNC Cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-101)
Wire harness assembly (P/N 26A-200ABC-301)
The two AMT-70 chassis should be placed into a rack mount. The rack-mount bracket is mounted
ideally between the two chassis at the rear of the modem. You may find it best to leave a 1-2U shelf
gap (but no more) between the modems in order to accommodate the rack mount bracket easily with
the units.
The entire system is illustrated in Figure 64 . Note that the gap between the units is greatly
exaggerated in order to present the connections in a clearer manner.
The DATA (ASI) input is ‘split’ to the 2 units. Using the 2 BNC-to-BNC cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001
and 26A-200ABC-101) connect from positions 1 and 2 on the splitter to the ASI ports (P7) on each unit.
One of the cables is longer, providing for the bracket to be closer to one of the units than the other if
necessary.
The Wire harness assembly (P/N 26A-200ABC-301) has two DB-15 connectors and is usually pre-
wired to the RF switch. If this is not the case, consult Chapter 5 for wiring details. Connect DB-15
ends to the P4 interfaces on each chassis.
The Wire harness assembly is hard-coded, meaning one end of the DB-15 associates with one ‘active
path’ on the RF switch and only this path.
The DB-15s have been marked ‘A’ and ‘B’, meaning that the unit connected to the ‘A’ end will be on the
‘1’ path for the RF switch, and ‘B’ on the ‘2’ path. The RF switch is labeled 1—C—2. Using the N-to-
SMA cables (P/N 26A-200ABC-001 and 26A-200ABC-201), connect chassis ‘A’ to position ‘1’ on the
switch and chassis ‘B’ to position ‘2’.

131
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

J5 (OUT)
P7 (ASI)

Shelf A P4

SWITCH
(OUT)

SPLITTER
(IN)

RACK-MOUNT RF OUT
BRACKET DATA IN

Shelf B

Figure 64: Redundancy Connections: ASI interface as Data Input

Skip to section 11.2 Software Configuration.

132
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

11.1.2 RS-530 / HSSI interface

The core redundancy hardware kit consists of the following:

• 1U rack mounted redunancy shelf (see below for appropriate Part Number)
• 2 x 15-Pin D-Sub M-M redundancy signalling cables (P/N 26A-400805-D01)
• 2 x AC Power Supply cables with North American plugs (P/N 670-000380-001)
• 2 x 25-Pin D-Sub M-M cables for RS-530 interface (P/N 26A-400805-E01)

i.e. the above section inventory is common to ALL 1:1 RS-530/HSSI kits.

The redundancy chassis comes with your choice of RF interface, one of 3 variants:
• BNC interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-000)
• TNC interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-100)
• F in / N out interface (Kit P/N 19A-250000-200)

For the BNC variant, the following are supplied:

• Core redundancy kit, as described at the top
• Redundancy shelf with BNC I/O (P/N 16A-250000-000)
• 4 x BNC-M to BNC-M cables (P/N 26A-100809-I01)

For the TNC variant, the following are supplied:

• Core redundancy kit, as described at the top
• Redunancy shelf with TNC I/O (P/N 16A-250000-100)
• 4 x TNC-M to TNC-M cables (P/N 26A-100809-L01)

For the F / N variant, the following are supplied:

• Core redundancy kit, as described at the top
• Redunancy shelf with F-type In / N-type Out (P/N 16A-250000-200)
• 2 x F-Male to F-Male cables (P/N 26A-100809-K01)
• 2 x N-Male to N-Male cables (P/N 26A-100809-M01)

Your redundancy kit may also include optional extras:

• 2 x SCSI-II M-M cables (HSSI operation) (P/N 670-00HSSI-002)

The three chassis should be placed into a rack mount. The 1:1 Redundancy unit is optimally placed
beneath the two AMT-70 chassis to be connected. A connection overview is illustrated in Figure 65.

__________________________________________________________________________
133
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

MODEM 'A' 1:1 REDUNDANCY MODEM 'B'

Redundancy
Redundancy

Redundancy
BUC / LNB
HSSI port

HSSI port
RS-530 /

RS-530 /
RS-530 / TX/RX
HSSI ports interface
RX

RX
TX

TX
LNB BUC
LAN, etc. Data DCE

Figure 65: RS-530 / HSSI redundancy system connection overview

Make data and RF cable connections before connecting the AC power supplies. Connections for RS-
530 and HSSI-based systems are illustrated in Figure 66 and Figure 67.
When the modems power up, the redundancy may not be active. To do this, use the command
‘redundancy on’ via the RS-232 port, after logging in to each modem. See the modem manual for
guidance on logging in. (Usually, modems supplied with a redundancy kit ship with the redudancy
enabled).
Selection of the ‘active’ or ‘on-line’ path is done automatically by the system. The system is
symmetrical and both modems should be configured with identical parameters. If both modems are
alive and good at simultaneous power-up, the last ‘on-line’ path is usually adopted. If a ‘good’ modem
powers up before the other ‘good’ modem powers up, it will assume the active path immediately.

134
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

__________________________________________________________________________

RS-530 DCE RS-530 DTE A RS-530 DTE B MODEM 'A' LNB TO MODEM RX
(To/From user net) (To/From Modem A) (To/From Modem B) REDUNDANCY (IN) A B

MODEM 'B' BUC FROM MODEM TX

AC POWER IN 1 AC POWER IN 2
REDUNDANCY (OUT) A B

Figure 66: 1:1 Redundancy shelf connections rear-view. RS-530 and BNC
connections shown

__________________________________________________________________________

MODEM 'A' LNB TO MODEM RX

REDUNDANCY (IN) A B

HSSI DCE HSSI DTE A HSSI DTE B MODEM 'B' BUC FROM MODEM TX
AC POWER IN 1 AC POWER IN 2
(To/From user net) (To/From Modem A) (To/From Modem B) REDUNDANCY (OUT) A B

Figure 67: 1:1 Redundancy shelf connections rear-view. HSSI and BNC
connections shown

135
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

11.1.2.1 Front panel push buttons

The two buttons ‘Switch to A’ and ‘Switch to B’ are used to ‘force’ the redundancy shelf to switch to
either Modem ‘A’ or Modem ‘B’ respectively.

Push buttons

LED indicators

Figure 68: 1-1 Redundancy Controller (R5-530/HSSI only) front panel

11.1.2.2 LED indicators

As illustrated in Figure 68.

Designation Description
PS 1 Internal Power Supply #1 is ON
PS 2 Internal Power Supply #2 is ON
Unit A Alarm Modem ‘A’ has asserted ‘Summary Fault’ condition
Note - summary fault conditions can be changed. This is described in
Chapter 3.
Unit B Alarm Modem ‘B’ has asserted ‘Summary Fault’ condition
Unit A On Line Modem ‘A’ is active
When illuminated, transmit and receive pass through Modem ‘A’
Unit B On Line Modem ‘B’ is active
Power On +12V sense for Modems and/or Redundancy unit

136
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

11.2 Software Configuration

In addition to the regular AMT-70 commands found in the main manual, a further five (5) are available
with the redundancy ‘enabled’ units.
These are detailed below.

Figure 69: AMT-70/73 Redundancy Commands

Command Description
redundancy Enable / Disable the redundancy feature
rdfltmask Redundancy Fault masking register
rdforce Force the unit (redundancy switch) to the ACTIVE path
rdstat Redundancy low-level status (diagnostic tool)
rdswpos Redundancy switch position

redundancy [ on | off ]

When the redundancy system is enabled (on), the redundancy port is monitored to check the status of
the other unit (if connected). In this state, the RF switch is controlled automatically by the redundancy
software.

The settings take effect on the next power-cycle or reboot.

# redundancy on
Redundancy = ON

rdfltmask

Redundancy Fault Mask. The redundancy system will always output ‘Fault’ to the other unit during a
reset condition or power-off. The Fault Mask register allows the user to provide more situations where
the Fault condition is generated. The Bit table of the Fault Mask Register below shows what further
conditions can be monitored.
The format of the command is as follow;

rdfltmask [ 0 - 255 ]

The user must compute the 8-bit value and use this as the argument to the command. Examples of
usage are shown below. The modem must be rebooted for rdfltmask changes to take effect.
Setting a value of 0 (zero) ‘masks’ ALL bits in the Fault Mask Register. In this state, any bit SET by the
software is IGNORED and only the reset condition is considered a fault.

137
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Conversely, setting a maximum value of 255 ‘unmasks’ ALL bits in the Fault Mask Register and any bit
SET by the software becomes a fault condition.

Figure 70: Redundancy Fault Mask Register

7 654 3 2 1 0 (LSB)

MOD. NOT RUNNING/ DEMOD COMMS

MOD. OUTPUT
- - - - UNLOCKED/ FPGA - FAILED/
ENABLED
FAILED UNLOCKED
Examples:

# rdfltmask 1
Redundancy Fault Mask = 1

Setting the Fault Mask to 1 means when the Modulator output is disabled for some reason, a fault
condition will be generated on the redundancy output. If the other unit’s redundancy system is
enabled, reads good and the cables are connected, the other unit will actuate the switch upon reading
the fault condition.
# rdfltmask 8
Redundancy Fault Mask = 8

A fault status is generated for an internal Modulator failure, but NOT for a disabled output problem.
(Setting rdfltmask 9 will consider ALL conditions above for fault output).

NOTE: The modem MUST be rebooted for rdfltmask changes to take effect.

rdforce

Force the Redundancy switch to the ACTIVE (on-line) position for this unit. Note that this command
will work whether the Redundancy system is enabled or disabled.
A one-second drive pulse is fed to the RF switch. Also note that the drive is one-way, i.e. the unit can
only drive the RF switch to the ACTIVE state for itself.
The user must communicate with the other unit directly and use the same command to drive the RF
switch in the opposite direction.

Example:

# rdforce

Switch is forced to ACTIVE for this unit

138
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

rdstat

This command is provided primarily as a debug tool. The user can see the redundancy software signal
I/O and the system interpretation of the signal statuses.

Example:

# rdstat

Redundancy System Parameters

Switch position: 0x0C
Discrete In: 0x01, Discrete Out: 0x00
This unit status: DISCONNECT, Good
Other unit reads: Fault

The command rdswpos read the position of the RF switch.

rdswpos

The status can be as follow; ACTIVE, REDUNDANT, DISCONNECT, SHORT or UNKNOWN.

Example:

# rdswpos
This Unit = REDUNDANT

The RF switch is switched to the other unit. This unit is the Redundant unit and the other is the Active
unit.

139
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

11.3 Messages
The following are console messages generated when the redundancy system is enabled.
N.B. ‘This unit’ refers to the console you are interfacing with. ‘Other unit’ refers to the other unit in the
redundancy system.
“REDUNDANT unit fault”
This unit is ACTIVE and has monitored the other unit as in a fault state. This message will appear
when this unit first senses the condition or condition change on the other unit.
“Switch fault (possible short)”
The redundancy cable is not connected properly, has a fault (most likely a short between the position
sensing inputs), or another cable with different functionality is connected. Power off the unit and check
the cabling.
“Switch unreadable (possible disconnect)”
Usually appears when the cable is disconnected, but could appear because of a bad cable. Check
cable wiring.
“System in unknown state”
This message should not appear in almost any circumstance. This may indicate redundancy software
failure.
“REDUNDANT unit ready”
This unit is ACTIVE and has monitored the other unit as in a ready (Good) state. This message will
appear when this unit first senses the condition or condition change on the other unit.

“ACTIVE unit fault”

This unit is REDUNDANT and has monitored the other unit as in a fault state. This is the RF path
switching condition. Provided this unit is in a Good state, the RF switch is driven to the ACTIVE role for
this unit. The other unit becomes the REDUNDANT unit.
“BOTH units fault”
This unit and the other unit have both been monitored as in a fault state.
“Unit now ACTIVE”
This message can appear either when the unit powers up with redundancy enabled, or after a Wire-
harness reconnect to this unit. This indicates this unit is the ACTIVE (on-line) unit.
“This unit REDUNDANT”
This message can appear either when the unit powers up with redundancy enabled, or after a Wire-
harness reconnect to this unit. This indicates this unit is the REDUNDANT (off-line) unit.

140
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 12 APPENDIX A SYSTEM

CONSIDERATIONS
A.1 Typical AMT-70L/AMT-73L Interconnections

Following are some useful tips on setting up an earth station using the AMT-70L/AMT-73L modem.

OUTDOOR

(ODU)
BUC
LNB

Antenna

INDOOR
Rx 950-2150 MHz
Data Port
AMT-70 Tx 950-2000 MHz
RS-530
(IDU)
L-band Modulator
L-band Demodulator
M&C Interface
Complete ODU Interface
Secondary M&C Interface RS-485

Figure 71: Typical AMT-70 cabling installation

INDOOR
1,2 Rx 52 - 88 MHz
(4) Data Ports Pwr C, X or Ku Band
3,4 Div From Antenna (LNA)
RS-530 AMT-70 Down Converter

C, X or Ku Band From Antenna (LNA)

Down Converter

Multiple M&C Interface

RS-232/RS-485
10/100 Base-T

Figure 72: Installation using 70 MHz Inputs

A.1.1 Setting the transmit levels

141
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The output power level of the modulator is adjustable from 0 to -25 dBm.
Figure 73: Power Loss in LMR-600 Cable versus Cable Length
-5

-10

BUC
Input -15
Level
(dBm)
-20

-25

-30

-35

-40
10 100 200 300

Length of LM R-600 Cable

(ft) 950 2000
MH MH

The TX gain past the modulator output should be set for the desired EIRP level of the Earth Station.

The ideal situation is to have the gain of the BUC set to give a rated output power of -25 dBm input.
Figure 73 illustrates the power reaching the BUC vs. the cable length between the modulator and the
BUC for two frequencies and with the modulator at maximum and minimum output power. The shaded
area in the previous indicates the useful range of the signal power available from the modulator output,
at the BUC input (for any length of cable up to 300 feet).
Some points to note:

In this case, LMR-600 cable from Times Microwave Systems is used. LMR-600 cable is low-loss.
If cable with a more typical loss of 12 dB per 100 feet is used, the maximum cable run is
approximately 100 feet. Other cables can be substituted for the LMR-600 Times Microwave
Systems cable, such as the CommScope 3227 cable, which has an attenuation of 6.05 dB @ 1800
MHz, which will increase the distance from the modem to the BUC by up to 200 feet.

The BUC power and gain are assumed to be 5W (37 dBm at 1 dB compression) unit with a fixed
gain of 50 dB. This chart indicates that the BUC will be in compression with a 300 ft cable and the
modem output set to +5 dBm and the highest frequency.

Slightly longer cable lengths are possible with BUCs of higher gain, though the slope delta worsens
with rising frequency.

Through the use of special slope equalizers and amplifiers, the distance between the modem and
the BUC can be extended.

142
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

It is important to note that a +24/+48 VDC offset and a 10MHz reference signal may be present at
the modulator output. The DC voltage may supply up to 4 Amperes and will damage any DC
coupled device (such as an attenuator) connected to the modulator output. Also, a typical
attenuator on the modulator output would reduce the level of 10 MHz reference signal available to
the BUC.
Special inline10/20 dB attenuators are available from AdvantechAMT that pass DC (up to 6A) and
10-50MHz reference in either direction and only attenuate the L-Band signals by the amount
specified.
Also available are amplitude/slope equalizers that compensate for losses and “tilt” caused by the cable
and other devices between the modem and the BUC, such as power combiners. Some are rack-
mounted units, which include self-contained power supplies, and others are in-line modules that utilize
the DC power from the modem.

A.2 LNB, BUC & Antenna Installation

A.2.1 Choosing the LNB & BUC

The AMT-70 product line is compatible with all OEM compliant BUC / LNB products. However the
AMT-70 product line is fully tested with the AdvantechAMT high power solid state power amplifiers
(SSPAs), booster amplifiers, block up converters for up-link applications and low noise amplifiers
(LNAs) for down-link applications.
The AdvantechAMT SSPAs are available in L-, C-, X- and Ku-Band models and are available in both
indoor rack-mount or in outdoor hub-mount weatherproof enclosures. AdvantechAMT also features the
tri-band SSPA which is designed to operate in any of the C-, X- and Ku- satellite communication bands.

A.2.2 LNB Physical Installation

Fit the LNB with a suitable feed horn and attach to the antenna ensuring correct *LNB polarization.
Connect a suitable 75R low loss co-axial cable between the receiver RF input and the LNB. The
connection to the LNB should be protected with self-amalgamating tape.
If the antenna has previously been accurately pointed at the required satellite the modem may be
switched on and the receiver parameters set.

A.2.3 Antenna Alignment

The following sub sections provide information on pointing the receive antenna accurately at the
required satellite.
The antenna must have a clear “line of sight” view of the satellite. This means that the pointing angle
must be clear of tall buildings, trees and other high objects. If the view to the south is generally clear
the antenna site will be suitable. However if there are obstructions to the south the actual pointing
angles will have be checked to see if the site is suitable.

A.2.4 Satellite Position

Most communications satellites appear stationary in the sky from any location on the earth. This is
because their speed is matched to the rotational speed of the earth taking into account the fact that
their orbit is much greater than the earth’s circumference. These satellites are said to be in
geostationary or geosynchronous orbits.
Geostationary satellites can only have one orbit, which is 22,238 miles (35,786 kilometers) directly
above the equator.

143
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

This single orbit has to be used because it is the only one where the G force generated by the speed a
satellite needs to travel at to match the earth’s rotation equals the gravitational pull of the earth. Any
other orbit and the satellite would either crash to earth or fly out into space.
The direction an antenna must point in order to receive the signal from a given satellite is determined
by the antenna’s location north or south of the equator and the position on the equator over which the
satellite is located.
A satellite’s position is given in degrees of latitude and longitude in the same manner as a position on
earth.
Latitude is measured in degrees north or south of the equator which is at 0 degrees latitude. The
range is from 90 degrees north via 0 to 90 degrees south. For example, London UK is 51° 32’ north
and Sydney Australia is 33°55’ south. Since any geostationary satellite must be over the equator its
latitude is always zero degrees.
Longitude is measured in degrees east or west of the Prime Meridian. The Prime Meridian is at 0°
longitude and is an imaginary line running north/south on the earth’s surface from the north pole to the
south pole and passing through the Greenwich Observatory in England. All other points in the world
are either east or west of this line. There are 360° of longitude expressed as 0° to 180° east and 0° to
180° west. 180°E is the same location as 180°W and this position is the International Date Line. For
example, Sydney Australia is at 151° 10’E whereas Washington DC USA is at 77° 00’W.
The latitude of a satellite is the same as that of the location on the equator directly below it.
For the purpose of calculation, latitude and longitude are represented as decimals. The sign of the
decimal is used to distinguish North (positive) and South (negative), and East (positive) and West
(negative).
So for the above examples:
Latitude (London, UK): 51°32’N +51.53°
Latitude (Sydney, Australia): 33°55’S -33.92°
Longitude (Sydney, Australia): 151°10’E +151.17°
Longitude (Washington DC, USA): 77°00’W -77.00°

A.2.5 Antenna Pointing Angles

The Azimuth and Elevation angles along which an antenna must point to receive a particular satellites
signal can be calculated. The information required for the calculation is the location, in latitude and
longitude, of the antenna and the longitude of the satellite. Three calculations are required, one to
calculate a value to be used in the Azimuth and elevation calculations.
The formulas are:

d= s 2 + e 2 − (2 ⋅ s ⋅ e ⋅ cos( a ) ⋅ cos( b − c ) )
⎛ s2 − e2 − d 2 ⎞
Elevation = sin −1 ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟
⎝ 2⋅e⋅d ⎠
⎛ s ⋅ sin (b − c ) ⎞
Azimuth = 180 ± tan −1 ⎜ ⎟
⎜ cos (Elevation ) ⋅ d 2 − s 2 ⋅ sin (b − c ) ⎟
⎝ ⎠

Where:
144
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

s = satellite distance from center of earth = 42165Km

e = radius of the earth = 6370Km
a = latitude of antenna (in degrees)
b = longitude of satellite (in degrees)
c = longitude of antenna (in degrees)
d = distance from antenna to satellite (in Km)
The sign of +/- in the azimuth calculation is determined by the relative positions of the antenna and
satellite. 180° is due south. If the satellite is east of the antenna the result of the calculation is
subtracted from 180. If the satellite is west of the antenna the result of the calculation is added to 180.
Example: Pointing an antenna at SES-ASTRA 1F (longitude b= +19.3°), from London, UK (latitude a =
51.5°, longitude c = -1.4°)

d = 42165 2 + 6370 2 − (2 ⋅ 41625 ⋅ 6370 ⋅ cos(51.5) ⋅ cos(19.2 + 1.4) ) = 38800 Km

⎛ 42165 2 − 6370 2 − 38800 2 ⎞
Elevation = sin −1 ⎜⎜ ⎟⎟ = 27.97 o
⎝ 2 ⋅ 6370 ⋅ 38800 ⎠
⎛ 42165 ⋅ sin (19.2 + 1.4) ⎞
Azimuth = 180 − tan −1 ⎜ ⎟ = 150.48o
⎜ cos(27.97 ) ⋅ 38800 2 − 42165 2 ⋅ sin (19.2 + 1.4 ) ⎟
⎝ ⎠

A.2.6 Pointing the Antenna

Use a sighting compass to align the antenna in azimuth and an inclinometer to set the elevation angle.
Subtract any antenna offset from the required elevation angle when measuring.
The antenna is now pointing approximately at the satellite but needs to be aligned more accurately for
use. Accurate alignment requires signal strength measuring equipment such as a spectrum analyzer.
Connect the spectrum analyzer to the antenna LNB. If the LNB requires a DC supply, ensure that this
is enabled. Also ensure that a DC block is inserted before the spectrum analyzer input to avoid
damage. Tune the spectrum analyzer to the correct down converted frequency.
Make a mark on the azimuth positioning assembly and another mark, in line with the first, on the fixed
part of the antenna assembly. Slowly rotate the antenna to about 10° either side of the mark (about
one eighth of a quadrant) whilst watching the spectrum analyzer for the signal. If the signal is found
peak it on the spectrum analyzer with the azimuth movement and lock the movement.
In a similar manner move the elevation through a few degrees to peak the signal. Lock the movement.
Rotate the LNB horn assembly to peak the signal in polarization. Once again, lock the movement.
Repeat all the above to ensure that the signal is fully peaked. Lock all movements making sure that
the locking off does not cause further movement.
If no signal is found during the azimuth movement return the antenna to center and increase the
elevation by an amount equal to the beam width of the antenna. Repeat the swings in azimuth.
If there is still no signal, increase the elevation by another beam width and sweep the azimuth again.
Continue in this manner until the elevation has been increase by 2 to 3 degrees.
If there is still no signal, lower the elevation from nominal and make the swings in azimuth. Ensure
that the azimuth moves are made very slowly otherwise the signal may be missed.

145
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

If the signal cannot be found check the calculations and the coarse pointing procedure before
repeating the above.
NOTE: If the satellite concerned is supporting TV signals, alignment may be carried out using standard
signal strength measuring equipment designed for the satellite TV industry. Substitute a standard
TVRO LNB and follow the above procedure whilst watching the signal strength meter. Once the
antenna is pointed in this way, refit the system LNB.
Alignment can be rechecked once the receiver has acquired the correct signal by using Eb/No readings
from the receiver and by monitoring the signal quality indicator on the front of the receiver.

A.2.7 Input Level Range Versus Symbol Rate

The composite input power range for the AMT-70L and the AMT-73L is dependant on the Symbol Rate
of the incoming data. (Remember, Symbol Rate is the transmitted data rate, and is dependant on Data
Rate, FEC Code Rate, and Modulation scheme. To calculate the Symbol Rate, the formula is as
follows:)
Data rate x 1/Code Rate
Symbol Rate =
Modulation

Where Modulation = 1 for BPSK; 2 for QPSK; 3 for 8PSK, and 4 for 16QAM
The charts below provide the range of input power versus data rate for the AMT-70L and the AMT-73L
modems.

AMT-70L Demod IF Carrier versus Symbol Rate

0.0

-10.0
Desired Carrier Input Level (dBm)

-20.0

-30.0

Maximum
-40.0

-50.0
Nominal

-60.0
Minimum

-70.0
10 100 1000 10000 100000
DesiredCarrierSymbolRate(ksps)

146
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

AMT-73L Demod IF Carrier versus Symbol Rate

0.0

-10.0
Desired Carrier Input Level (dBm)

-20.0

-30.0

-40.0

-50.0 Maximum

-60.0

Nominal
-70.0

-80.0
Minimum
-90.0

-100.0
10 100 1000 10000 100000
Desired Carrier Symbol Rate (ksps)

147
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 13 APPENDIX B S/N TO EB/NO

CONVERSION
Eb/No or more properly, Eb/N0, is defined as the ratio of Energy per Bit to Spectral Noise Density in a
1 Hz bandwidth. It is used in digital communications to define the signal strength required at the input
of the demodulator to provide a desired Bit Error Ratio (BER). Eb/No is independent of the system data
rate and symbol rate. Eb/No is difficult to measure with standard test equipment, such as Spectrum
Analyzers. The typical Spectrum Analyzer displays a ratio of Signal plus Noise/Noise, or (S + N)/N.

The charts below provides the (S + N)/N to Eb/No conversions for the most popular modulation and
code rates.
A simple but quick method of determining Eb/No is obtained by measuring the (S + N)/N value using
an accurate Spectrum Analyzer. The analyzer needs to be looking at the same signal that the
demodulator will see. A two-way power divider in the receive path with one output connected to the
Spectrum Analyzer and the other to the demod input is acceptable. The common input would be from
the satellite feed. Follow the steps below to obtain a reasonable measurement of (S + N)/N, which then
can be translated to Eb/No values by using the following charts.

• Set the Resolution Bandwidth to less than 20% of the transmitted symbol rate.
• Set the Video Resolution to reduce the noise variation. Video averaging is also acceptable, if
the analyzer has that feature.
• Start at 10 dB per vertical division and scale down to 2 dB (if possible) to obtain the noise floor
/ carrier within the same display. This will allow the measurement to be more accurate.
• Using the Spectrum Analyzer marker, place the marker over the center part of the wanted
carrier. If the analyzer includes a delta measurement capability, then use the delta marker
placed over a blank area of the noise (no carriers present), and read the difference between
the carrier level and the noise level. This value is the (S + N)/N.
• If the spectrum analyzer does not have a delta marker function, then record the carrier signal
level, then record the noise level, and subtract the two. This value will constitute the (S + N)/N
reading.
• Then using the following charts, select the Eb/No that is closest to the obtained (S + N)/N,
remembering that you must follow the proper modulation type and FEC code rate.

148
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
(dB) (dB) Viterbi 1/2 Viterbi 2/3 Viterbi 3/4 Viterbi 7/8 TPC16K-2/5 TPC16K-3/5 TPC4K-3/4 TPC16K-8/9 TPC16K-19/20
(S+N)/N Es/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0
4.0 1.8 1.8 0.5 0.0 -0.6 2.3 1.1 -0.1 -0.6 -0.8
4.5 2.6 2.6 1.3 0.8 0.2 3.1 1.9 0.7 0.2 0.0
5.0 3.3 3.3 2.1 1.6 0.9 3.8 2.6 1.5 1.0 0.7
5.5 4.1 4.1 2.8 2.3 1.6 4.5 3.4 2.2 1.7 1.4
6.0 4.7 4.7 3.5 3.0 2.3 5.2 4.0 2.9 2.4 2.1
6.5 5.4 5.4 4.1 3.6 3.0 5.9 4.7 3.5 3.0 2.8
7.0 6.0 6.0 4.8 4.3 3.6 6.5 5.3 4.2 3.7 3.4
7.5 6.6 6.6 5.4 4.9 4.2 7.1 5.9 4.8 4.3 4.0
8.0 7.3 7.3 6.0 5.5 4.8 7.7 6.5 5.4 4.9 4.6
8.5 7.8 7.8 6.6 6.1 5.4 8.3 7.1 6.0 5.5 5.2
9.0 8.4 8.4 7.2 6.7 6.0 8.9 7.7 6.6 6.0 5.8
9.5 9.0 9.0 7.7 7.2 6.6 9.5 8.3 7.1 6.6 6.4
10.0 9.5 9.5 8.3 7.8 7.1 10.0 8.8 7.7 7.2 6.9
10.5 10.1 10.1 8.8 8.3 7.7 10.6 9.4 8.2 7.7 7.5
11.0 10.6 10.6 9.4 8.9 8.2 11.1 9.9 8.8 8.3 8.0
11.5 11.2 11.2 9.9 9.4 8.8 11.7 10.5 9.3 8.8 8.6
12.0 11.7 11.7 10.5 10.0 9.3 12.2 11.0 9.9 9.3 9.1
12.5 12.2 12.2 11.0 10.5 9.8 12.7 11.5 10.4 9.9 9.6
13.0 12.8 12.8 11.5 11.0 10.3 13.3 12.1 10.9 10.4 10.2
13.5 13.3 13.3 12.1 11.5 10.9 13.8 12.6 11.5 10.9 10.7
14.0 13.8 13.8 12.6 12.1 11.4 14.3 13.1 12.0 11.5 11.2
14.5 14.3 14.3 13.1 12.6 11.9 14.8 13.6 12.5 12.0 11.7
15.0 14.9 14.9 13.6 13.1 12.4 15.3 14.2 13.0 12.5 12.2
15.5 15.4 15.4 14.1 13.6 12.9 15.9 14.7 13.5 13.0 12.8
16.0 15.9 15.9 14.6 14.1 13.5 16.4 15.2 14.0 13.5 13.3
16.5 16.4 16.4 15.2 14.6 14.0 16.9 15.7 14.6 14.0 13.8
17.0 16.9 16.9 15.7 15.2 14.5 17.4 16.2 15.1 14.5 14.3
17.5 17.4 17.4 16.2 15.7 15.0 17.9 16.7 15.6 15.1 14.8
18.0 17.9 17.9 16.7 16.2 15.5 18.4 17.2 16.1 15.6 15.3
18.5 18.4 18.4 17.2 16.7 16.0 18.9 17.7 16.6 16.1 15.8
19.0 18.9 18.9 17.7 17.2 16.5 19.4 18.2 17.1 16.6 16.3
19.5 19.5 19.5 18.2 17.7 17.0 19.9 18.7 17.6 17.1 16.8
20.0 20.0 20.0 18.7 18.2 17.5 20.4 19.3 18.1 17.6 17.3
20.5 20.5 20.5 19.2 18.7 18.0 20.9 19.8 18.6 18.1 17.8
21.0 21.0 21.0 19.7 19.2 18.5 21.4 20.3 19.1 18.6 18.3
21.5 21.5 21.5 20.2 19.7 19.0 21.9 20.8 19.6 19.1 18.9
22.0 22.0 22.0 20.7 20.2 19.5 22.4 21.3 20.1 19.6 19.4
22.5 22.5 22.5 21.2 20.7 20.0 23.0 21.8 20.6 20.1 19.9
23.0 23.0 23.0 21.7 21.2 20.5 23.5 22.3 21.1 20.6 20.4
23.5 23.5 23.5 22.2 21.7 21.1 24.0 22.8 21.6 21.1 20.9
24.0 24.0 24.0 22.7 22.2 21.6 24.5 23.3 22.1 21.6 21.4
24.5 24.5 24.5 23.2 22.7 22.1 25.0 23.8 22.6 22.1 21.9
25.0 25.0 25.0 23.7 23.2 22.6 25.5 24.3 23.1 22.6 22.4

Figure 74: QSSK (S+N) Conversion Chart

149
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

(dB) (dB) Viterbi 1/2 Viterbi 2/3 Viterbi 3/4 Viterbi 7/8 TPC16K-2/5 TPC16K-3/5 TPC4K-3/4 TPC16K-8/9 TPC16K-19/20
(S+N)/N Es/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0
4.0 1.8 0.0 -1.2 -1.7 -2.4 0.5 -0.7 -1.8 -2.3 -2.6
4.5 2.6 0.8 -0.4 -0.9 -1.6 1.3 0.1 -1.0 -1.5 -1.8
5.0 3.3 1.6 0.3 -0.2 -0.8 2.1 0.9 -0.3 -0.8 -1.0
5.5 4.1 2.3 1.1 0.5 -0.1 2.8 1.6 0.5 -0.1 -0.3
6.0 4.7 3.0 1.7 1.2 0.6 3.5 2.3 1.1 0.6 0.4
6.5 5.4 3.6 2.4 1.9 1.2 4.1 2.9 1.8 1.3 1.0
7.0 6.0 4.3 3.0 2.5 1.8 4.7 3.6 2.4 1.9 1.7
7.5 6.6 4.9 3.6 3.1 2.5 5.4 4.2 3.0 2.5 2.3
8.0 7.3 5.5 4.2 3.7 3.1 6.0 4.8 3.6 3.1 2.9
8.5 7.8 6.1 4.8 4.3 3.6 6.6 5.4 4.2 3.7 3.5
9.0 8.4 6.7 5.4 4.9 4.2 7.1 5.9 4.8 4.3 4.0
9.5 9.0 7.2 6.0 5.5 4.8 7.7 6.5 5.4 4.9 4.6
10.0 9.5 7.8 6.5 6.0 5.4 8.3 7.1 5.9 5.4 5.2
10.5 10.1 8.3 7.1 6.6 5.9 8.8 7.6 6.5 6.0 5.7
11.0 10.6 8.9 7.6 7.1 6.4 9.4 8.2 7.0 6.5 6.3
11.5 11.2 9.4 8.2 7.7 7.0 9.9 8.7 7.6 7.1 6.8
12.0 11.7 10.0 8.7 8.2 7.5 10.4 9.3 8.1 7.6 7.3
12.5 12.2 10.5 9.2 8.7 8.1 11.0 9.8 8.6 8.1 7.9
13.0 12.8 11.0 9.8 9.3 8.6 11.5 10.3 9.2 8.6 8.4
13.5 13.3 11.5 10.3 9.8 9.1 12.0 10.8 9.7 9.2 8.9
14.0 13.8 12.1 10.8 10.3 9.6 12.5 11.4 10.2 9.7 9.4
14.5 14.3 12.6 11.3 10.8 10.2 13.1 11.9 10.7 10.2 10.0
15.0 14.9 13.1 11.8 11.3 10.7 13.6 12.4 11.2 10.7 10.5
15.5 15.4 13.6 12.4 11.9 11.2 14.1 12.9 11.8 11.2 11.0
16.0 15.9 14.1 12.9 12.4 11.7 14.6 13.4 12.3 11.8 11.5
16.5 16.4 14.6 13.4 12.9 12.2 15.1 13.9 12.8 12.3 12.0
17.0 16.9 15.2 13.9 13.4 12.7 15.6 14.4 13.3 12.8 12.5
17.5 17.4 15.7 14.4 13.9 13.2 16.1 15.0 13.8 13.3 13.0
18.0 17.9 16.2 14.9 14.4 13.7 16.6 15.5 14.3 13.8 13.6
18.5 18.4 16.7 15.4 14.9 14.2 17.2 16.0 14.8 14.3 14.1
19.0 18.9 17.2 15.9 15.4 14.8 17.7 16.5 15.3 14.8 14.6
19.5 19.5 17.7 16.4 15.9 15.3 18.2 17.0 15.8 15.3 15.1
20.0 20.0 18.2 16.9 16.4 15.8 18.7 17.5 16.3 15.8 15.6
20.5 20.5 18.7 17.5 16.9 16.3 19.2 18.0 16.9 16.3 16.1
21.0 21.0 19.2 18.0 17.4 16.8 19.7 18.5 17.4 16.8 16.6
21.5 21.5 19.7 18.5 17.9 17.3 20.2 19.0 17.9 17.3 17.1
22.0 22.0 20.2 19.0 18.5 17.8 20.7 19.5 18.4 17.8 17.6
22.5 22.5 20.7 19.5 19.0 18.3 21.2 20.0 18.9 18.3 18.1
23.0 23.0 21.2 20.0 19.5 18.8 21.7 20.5 19.4 18.8 18.6
23.5 23.5 21.7 20.5 20.0 19.3 22.2 21.0 19.9 19.3 19.1
24.0 24.0 22.2 21.0 20.5 19.8 22.7 21.5 20.4 19.9 19.6
24.5 24.5 22.7 21.5 21.0 20.3 23.2 22.0 20.9 20.4 20.1
25.0 25.0 23.2 22.0 21.5 20.8 23.7 22.5 21.4 20.9 20.6

Figure 75: 8PSK (S+N) Conversion Chart

150
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
(dB) (dB) Viterbi 1/2 Viterbi 2/3 Viterbi 3/4 Viterbi 7/8 TPC16K-2/5 TPC16K-3/5 TPC4K-3/4 TPC16K-8/9 TPC16K-19/20
(S+N)/N Es/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0 Eb/N0
4.0 1.8 -1.2 -2.5 -3.0 -3.6 -0.7 -1.9 -3.1 -3.6 -3.8
4.5 2.6 -0.4 -1.7 -2.2 -2.8 0.1 -1.1 -2.3 -2.8 -3.0
5.0 3.3 0.3 -0.9 -1.4 -2.1 0.8 -0.4 -1.5 -2.0 -2.3
5.5 4.1 1.1 -0.2 -0.7 -1.4 1.5 0.3 -0.8 -1.3 -1.6
6.0 4.7 1.7 0.5 0.0 -0.7 2.2 1.0 -0.1 -0.6 -0.9
6.5 5.4 2.4 1.1 0.6 0.0 2.9 1.7 0.5 0.0 -0.2
7.0 6.0 3.0 1.8 1.3 0.6 3.5 2.3 1.2 0.7 0.4
7.5 6.6 3.6 2.4 1.9 1.2 4.1 2.9 1.8 1.3 1.0
8.0 7.3 4.2 3.0 2.5 1.8 4.7 3.5 2.4 1.9 1.6
8.5 7.8 4.8 3.6 3.1 2.4 5.3 4.1 3.0 2.5 2.2
9.0 8.4 5.4 4.2 3.6 3.0 5.9 4.7 3.6 3.0 2.8
9.5 9.0 6.0 4.7 4.2 3.5 6.4 5.3 4.1 3.6 3.4
10.0 9.5 6.5 5.3 4.8 4.1 7.0 5.8 4.7 4.2 3.9
10.5 10.1 7.1 5.8 5.3 4.7 7.6 6.4 5.2 4.7 4.5
11.0 10.6 7.6 6.4 5.9 5.2 8.1 6.9 5.8 5.3 5.0
11.5 11.2 8.2 6.9 6.4 5.7 8.6 7.5 6.3 5.8 5.6
12.0 11.7 8.7 7.5 6.9 6.3 9.2 8.0 6.9 6.3 6.1
12.5 12.2 9.2 8.0 7.5 6.8 9.7 8.5 7.4 6.9 6.6
13.0 12.8 9.8 8.5 8.0 7.3 10.2 9.1 7.9 7.4 7.1
13.5 13.3 10.3 9.0 8.5 7.9 10.8 9.6 8.4 7.9 7.7
14.0 13.8 10.8 9.6 9.1 8.4 11.3 10.1 9.0 8.4 8.2
14.5 14.3 11.3 10.1 9.6 8.9 11.8 10.6 9.5 9.0 8.7
15.0 14.9 11.9 10.6 10.1 9.4 12.3 11.1 10.0 9.5 9.2
15.5 15.4 12.4 11.1 10.6 9.9 12.8 11.7 10.5 10.0 9.7
16.0 15.9 12.9 11.6 11.1 10.4 13.4 12.2 11.0 10.5 10.3
16.5 16.4 13.4 12.1 11.6 11.0 13.9 12.7 11.5 11.0 10.8
17.0 16.9 13.9 12.7 12.1 11.5 14.4 13.2 12.1 11.5 11.3
17.5 17.4 14.4 13.2 12.7 12.0 14.9 13.7 12.6 12.0 11.8
18.0 17.9 14.9 13.7 13.2 12.5 15.4 14.2 13.1 12.6 12.3
18.5 18.4 15.4 14.2 13.7 13.0 15.9 14.7 13.6 13.1 12.8
19.0 18.9 15.9 14.7 14.2 13.5 16.4 15.2 14.1 13.6 13.3
19.5 19.5 16.4 15.2 14.7 14.0 16.9 15.7 14.6 14.1 13.8
20.0 20.0 16.9 15.7 15.2 14.5 17.4 16.2 15.1 14.6 14.3
20.5 20.5 17.5 16.2 15.7 15.0 17.9 16.7 15.6 15.1 14.8
21.0 21.0 18.0 16.7 16.2 15.5 18.4 17.2 16.1 15.6 15.3
21.5 21.5 18.5 17.2 16.7 16.0 18.9 17.8 16.6 16.1 15.8
22.0 22.0 19.0 17.7 17.2 16.5 19.4 18.3 17.1 16.6 16.3
22.5 22.5 19.5 18.2 17.7 17.0 19.9 18.8 17.6 17.1 16.8
23.0 23.0 20.0 18.7 18.2 17.5 20.4 19.3 18.1 17.6 17.3
23.5 23.5 20.5 19.2 18.7 18.0 20.9 19.8 18.6 18.1 17.9
24.0 24.0 21.0 19.7 19.2 18.5 21.4 20.3 19.1 18.6 18.4
24.5 24.5 21.5 20.2 19.7 19.0 21.9 20.8 19.6 19.1 18.9
25.0 25.0 22.0 20.7 20.2 19.5 22.5 21.3 20.1 19.6 19.4

Figure 76: 16QAM (S+N)/N Conversion Chart

151
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 14 APPENDIX C EMBEDDED

ROUTER
AMT70/73 modems can be optionally equipped with the Advantech Embedded Router module (AERo)
that provides the AMT70/73 modems with the full functionality of an IP router, FRAD (Frame Relay
Access Device) and bridge. With this option the AMT70/73 modems, without the need for any
additional data telecommunication equipment, can support a wide range of network solutions.

RFFE Out RFFE In

AMT70 AMT70
Mod Demod

DCE DCE
RS-530 RS-530
TX RX

DTE DTE DTE DTE

RS-530 RS-530 RS-530 RS-530
TX RX TX RX
Serial 0 Serial 1

AERo
Advantech Embedded Router
RS-232
10/100B-T
Console

Figure 77: Embedded Router Support

The AERo option adds two additional RJ-45 connectors (JA and JB) to the rear panel – Figure 2.
Connector JA provides a standard 10/100B-T data connection and JB a RS-232, Cisco like, control
console port.

Figure 78: AMT-70/73L Rear Panel equipped with AERo option

152
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

AERo supports standard Advantech set of the interfaces:

Physical interfaces:
• WAN: bidirectional and receive only up to 20Mbit/s;
• LAN: 10/100Base-T

Data Link:
• WAN - HDLC (Cisco compatible), PPP, Frame Relay;
• LAN IEEE802.3 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-T

Bridging;
• MAC level access lists;
• VLAN

TCP/IP stack:
• Routing: static, dynamic (RIP v.1, v.2);
• Packets filtering (firewall);
• IP tunneling (IP over IP, GRE);
• Static switching;
• IP aliases support;
• Proxy ARP;
• UDP broadcasts forwarding (DHCP, DNS, BOOTP, etc.)

QoS Level 3:
• FIFO queue (FIFOQ);
• Priority queuing (PRIQ);
• Class based queuing (CBQ);
• Hierarchical Fair Service Curve (HFSC);
• Random Early Detection (RED);
• Waited Fair Queue (WFQ)

Configurable IP policy:
• ICMP policy;
• Routing policy;
• Switching policy;
• TCP policy;
• UDP policy

Frame Relay Stack:

• Frame Relay PVC;
• Link management: ITU-T Q.933 / Annex A, ANSI T1.617 / Annex D, LMI or disabled;
• QoS: Priority; CIR, Bc, Be;
• Interface types : UNI – User; UNI – Network; NNI;
• Multiprotocol encapsulation: RFC1490 (IP over FR);
• Frame Relay switching;
• Frame Relay fragmentation: FRF12 (UNI-NNI, End to End)

153
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Services:

• DHCP client;
• DNS client;
• FTP/TFTP client;
• NAT;
• CDP;
• IP spoofing;
• AAA (Authentication, authorization and accounting):
• Local AAA (Access rights table);
• PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP (Client/ Server);
• RADIUS, TACACS+ (Client, Remote server authentication)

Management:

• Terminal configuration ports: RS-232 console and telnet;

• Terminal configuration interface;
• Cisco like command interpreter;
• Script support;
• Running and startup configurations saving and recovery;
• SNMP agent v.1, v.2, v.3, MIB II;
• Built-in diagnostic;
• Ping, traceroute;
• Local statistics (interfaces, IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Frame Relay and etc.);
• Debugging functions

154
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 15 APPENDIX D HIGH-

PERFORMANCE GATEWAY
The high-speed AMT-7x family of modems can optionally be equipped with the Advantech High-
Performance Gateway (AHPG). The AHPG is a sophisticated, leading-edge interface that can support
a full range of data traffic capabilities, from transparent bridging for simple applications, to complicated
dynamic and static routing and switching. The AHPG can support unidirectional or bidirectional,
symmetrical or non-symmetrical links. On the WAN side it can support a flexible set of encapsulations
including HDLC, Frame Relay, MPE and ULE.

10/100BT
Port 0 PHY MAC
(ETH0)

HDLC

Codec

10/100BT
Port 1 PHY MAC
(ETH1)
RF OUT
AMT-70
MODULATOR
Serial - to - parallel

Internal
HSSI
Traffic
(DCE)
Routing

RF IN
AMT-70
Console I/F DEMODULATOR
IP GATEWAY
(CONSOLE
CONTROLLER
RS-232)

NMS CONTROL
PROCESSOR 9-pin serial
(LINUX) port
(P7 RS232)

Front Panel Ethernet

control (Via (Telnet
menus) Session)

Figure 79. AHPG support

155
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
The AHPG supports standard Advantech set of the interfaces:

Physical interfaces:
• WAN: bidirectional and receive only up to 140Mbit/s;
• LAN: 2 x 10/100Base-T or HSSI

Data Link:
• WAN - HDLC (Cisco compatible), PPP, Frame Relay;
• LAN IEEE802.3 10Base-T, IEEE802.3u 100Base-T

Bridging;
• MAC level access lists;
• VLAN

TCP/IP stack:
• Routing: static, dynamic (RIP v.1, v.2);
• Packets filtering (firewall);
• IP tunneling (IP over IP, GRE);
• Static switching;
• IP aliases support;
• Proxy ARP;
• UDP broadcasts forwarding (DHCP, DNS, BOOTP, etc.)

QoS Level 3:
• FIFO queue (FIFOQ);
• Priority queuing (PRIQ);
• Class based queuing (CBQ);
• Hierarchical Fair Service Curve (HFSC);
• Random Early Detection (RED);
• Weighted Fair Queue (WFQ)

Configurable IP policy:
• ICMP policy;
• Routing policy;
• Switching policy;
• TCP policy;
• UDP policy

Frame Relay Stack:

• Frame Relay PVC;
• Link management: ITU-T Q.933 / Annex A, ANSI T1.617 / Annex D, LMI or disabled;
• QoS: Priority; CIR, Bc, Be;
• Interface types : UNI – User; UNI – Network; NNI;
• Multiprotocol encapsulation: RFC1490 (IP over FR);
• Frame Relay switching;
• Frame Relay fragmentation: FRF12 (UNI-NNI, End to End)

Services:

• DHCP client;

156
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
• DNS client;
• FTP/TFTP client;
• NAT;
• CDP;
• IP spoofing;
• AAA (Authentication, authorization and accounting):
• Local AAA (Access rights table);
• PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP (Client/ Server);
• RADIUS, TACACS+ (Client, Remote server authentication)

Management:

• Terminal configuration ports: RS-232 console and telnet;

• Terminal configuration interface;
• Cisco like command interpreter;
• Script support;
• Running and startup configurations saving and recovery;
• SNMP agent v.1, v.2, v.3, MIB II;
• Built-in diagnostic;
• Ping, traceroute;
• Local statistics (interfaces, IP, TCP, UDP, ICMP, Frame Relay, etc.);
• Debugging functions

15.1 Getting Started

In this section we will attempt to configure a simple point-to-point connection at two different data rates
(40Mbps and 10Mbps). This will be based on the default WAN protocol, HDLC using two AMT-75
modems with AHPG routers installed.

There are effectively 2 areas of configuration we are concerned with:

• Modem IF/RF channel (Physical and Data-link layer)

• IP Gateway network

In this example, it will be assumed that the first area of concern – modem Tx/Rx frequency, data rates,
coding types, etc. are already set as desired. We will primarily concern ourselves with the
configuration of the IP Gateway (AHPG), which is done via a separate port (Labelled CONSOLE on the
rear of the Modem chassis). Briefly we will check the interface selection in immediate following
section.

15.1.1 Modem M&C configuration

This is done via the regular M&C port (Labelled RS-232 M&C) or via the front panel.

Configure interface for “Ethernet”. This is achieved with the console command ‘ifmode ethernet’ or
by selecting INTERFACE > MODE > ETHERNET on the front panel.

Following this command, data traffic will be routed via the ETH0/ETH1 ports (dependent upon router
configuration which follows).

157
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

15.1.2 Router module configuration

This is done via the CONSOLE port on the rear of the Modem.

The router M&C operates independently of the Modem M&C and offers the user a comprehensive set
of control commands compliant with Cisco syntax. These are detailed in the “Communications
Processor” document, “Advantech IP Gateway Rev.1” accompanying this manual.

Connection to the router M&C is made directly via the serial interface, labeled CONSOLE on the rear of
the modem chassis.

As stated at the beginning, the purpose of this exercise is to illustrate a simple point-to-point link with
two AMT-75+AHPG modems. Figure 80 illustrates what we are trying to achieve.

Computer Computer
Application level
192.168.1.4
text 172.16.3.20
text
NM255.255.255.0 NM 255.255.0.0
GW 192.168.1.1 GW 172.16.1.1

LAN LAN

Netmask: 255.255.255.0 Netmask: 255.255.0.0

WAN
10.0.0.0 / 8
Ethernet 0 Serial 0 or Serial 0 or Ethernet 0
Serial 0/1 Serial 0/1
192.168.1.1 172.16.1.1
NM
255.255.255.0
10.0.0.1 / 8 10.0.0.2 / 8 NM 255.255.0.0

AHPG AHPG
Modem Modem
Gateway Gateway
route 172.16.0.0/16 10.0.0.2 route 192.168.1.0/8 10.0.0.1
AMT-75 #1 AMT-75 #2

Figure 80: Simple point-to-point configuration of two AMT-75 Modems

158
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

The computer (1) connected via the LAN to AMT-75 #1 has the following parameters:

IP Address 192.168.1.4
Subnet Mask 255.255.255.0
Gateway 192.168.1.1

This enables computer 1 to communicate beyond the LAN via the AMT-75 #1 gateway. Likewise,
computer 2 has the following parameters in order to communicate with the AMT-75 #2 gateway:

IP Address 172.16.3.20
Subnet Mask 255.255.0.0
Gateway 172.16.1.1

Now, to configure the gateways:

Gateway 1 (192.168.1.1):

Connect to the CONSOLE port on Modem 1 and start a terminal application.

You should see the prompt

>

Type enable and press [ENTER]. The prompt changes:

To clear the existing router configuration (if necessary), enter the following command:

#clear startup-config

If you are returned to the ‘>’ prompt, repeat the enable step above.

Set the Gateway (LAN) address Enter the following lines:

#configure terminal
(config)#interface Ethernet 0
(config-if)#ip address 192.168.1.1/8
(config-if)#no shutdown
(config-if)#exit

Note the /8 in the IP address is the Subnetmask. /8 means 255.255.255.0

Note also that you may use the <TAB> key to auto-complete any command entered.

Set up the serial (WAN) port Enter the following lines:

#configure terminal
(config)#interface Serial 1/0
(config-if)#ip address 1.0.0.1/8
(config-if)#no shutdown
(config-if)#exit

159
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Set up the routing Enter the following:

(config)#ip route 172.16.0.0/16 10.0.0.2

(config)#exit

The /16 specifies a subnet of 255.255.0.0. This means “any IP packet with address 172.16… route to
IP address 10.0.0.2”. In effect, route over our mini-WAN as shown in Figure 80.

To show the running configuration, Enter the following:

#sh ru

A page of information showing the IP addresses and route we just set up will appear.

Save the configuration to NVRAM. Enter the following:

#copy running-config startup-config

Gateway 2 (172.16.1.1):

Same procedure as for Gateway 1, except with our desired settings for this particular LAN.
Connect to the CONSOLE on Modem 2 and enter the following:

>enable
#configure terminal
(config)#interface Ethernet 0
(config-if)#ip address 172.16.1.1/8
(config-if)#no shutdown
(config-if)#exit
(config)#interface Serial 1/0
(config-if)#ip address 10.0.0.2/8
(config-if)#exit
(config)#ip route 192.168.1.0/8 10.0.0.1
(config)#exit
#copy running-config startup-config

Connection check

Now we have fully configured the two computers, modems and gateways a connection check can be
performed using the ping service on each computer. Try to ping the remote computer on each end. If
successful, a reply message will be received. If not, a timed out message will be printed.
For Windows PCs, start a DOS console and type ping <remote address> where remote address
is the address of the remote computer.

160
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 16 APPENDIX E G.703

TELECOMMUNICATIONS GATEWAY
The Telecommunications Gateway for Advantech AMT 3X, 6X and 7X series of modems is a
powerful interface card adding to the standard EIA-530, multiple E1/T1 G703 interfaces, 10/100BaseT
Ethernet (IP Gateway) and optionally 2 x FXS analog telephony line interfaces.

The balanced G703 interface can be configured for either E1 or T1 lines and for either symmetric or
asymmetric Drop and Insert capability. Up to eight G703 telecommunication E1/T1 traffic and IP data
interfaces can be multiplexed into the same Satellite SCPC transmission. Legacy RS530 traffic is also
supported.

The Telecommunications Gateway data interface card provides a full duplex framing and de-framing
transceiver for eight T1 or E1 ports. The Gateway also supports an Advantech Proprietary Overhead
Channel (APOC) providing 64 KHz overhead data and an optional 64 KHz voice channel.

Drop & Insert Mode is supported at both DS-0 and T1/E1 level (through DS-0 level) with either CCS or
CAS signaling. Ethernet interface is supported stand-alone or combined (multiplexed) with G.703 in the
same traffic using proprietary APOC.

• Two Quad T1/E1 SCTs (single chip transceiver) DS21458 interface;

• Ethernet 10/100 Base-T interface;
• Drop & Insert capability is supported for up to 256 DS-0 timeslots with proprietary framing
structure (up to 240 or 248 timeslots, depending on the frame structure with the associated
signaling;
• Optional single 64 KHz or dual 32 KHz APOC Overhead Voice Channel (Legerity LE78D11);
• Optional RS-422 transparent 64 Kbps channel which is mapped into APOC Overhead Data
Channel;
• Ethernet (via Host CPU) à SCC (Serial Communication Controller) or UTOPIA interface;
• Frames the incoming data with Advantech Proprietary Overhead Channel (APOC), a TDM-
based frame while dynamically allocating its contents;
• Selectable Internal 1Mbit or External 4 Mbit G.703 Doppler Buffer with granularity of 2 bytes
(16 bits);
• Total up to 100 Mbps throughput.

16.1 Rear Panel Connector Arrangements

Note: Unlike other modems in this series the RS232 Modem Console connector is located on
the front panel.

P7 RS-485

Figure 81: Rear Panel

161
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.1.1 RS-232 Console Connector (J3)

To Monitor and Control the Telecommunications Gateway Interface connect the D Sub 9-pin connector
(J3) to the COM port of a PC or similar device.

D-Sub 9 connector
Description
Pin Number
Pin 1 Not used
Pin 2 Tx Data
Pin 3 Rx Data
Pin 4 Not Used
Pin 5 Ground
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used
Pin 9 Not used

16.1.2 Overhead D-Sub 15 pin Connector (J14)

To Monitor and Control the Telecommunications Gateway Interface connect the D Sub 9-pin connector
(J3) to the COM port of a PC or similar device.

D-sub 15 connector
Description
Pin Number
Pin 1 Rx Clock +
Pin 2 Rx Clock –
Pin 3 Rx Data +
Pin 4 Rx Data –
Pin 5 Ground
Pin 6 Tx Clock +
Pin 7 Tx Clock –
Pin 8 Tx Data +
Pin 9 Tx Data –
Pin 10 Not Used
Pin 11 SCTE +
Pin 12 SCTE –
Pin 13 Not Used
Pin 14 Not Used
Pin 15 Ground

162
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.1.3 RJ-45 Ethernet Console Connector Pin Out (J5)

The 10/100BaseT Ethernet M&C connection utilizes a RJ-45 connector, as shown in the following
figure, which also depicts the arrangement of the pins looking into the connector.

RJ-45 Crossover Cable

Description Wire Color Codes
Pin Number Pins
Pin 1 Tx + White & Orange 3
Pin 2 Tx – Orange 6
Pin 3 Rx + White & Green 1
Pin 4 Common Blue --
Pin 5 Common White & Blue --
Pin 6 Rx – Green 2
Pin 7 Common White & Brown --
Pin 8 Common Brown --

16.1.4 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 1-4 (J16/1/2/3/4)

This connector provides access to four E1/T1 ports 1 to 4. The connector is comprised of four RJ45
connectors wired as follows:

Connector J16/1

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-1
Pin 2 RTIP-1
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-1
Pin 5 TTIP-1
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

163
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Connector J16/2

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-2
Pin 2 RTIP-2
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-2
Pin 5 TTIP-2
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

Connector J16/3

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-3
Pin 2 RTIP-3
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-3
Pin 5 TTIP-3
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

Connector J16/4

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-4
Pin 2 RTIP-4
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-4
Pin 5 TTIP-4
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

164
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.1.5 Balanced E1/T1 Connector Ports 5-8 (J17/1/2/3/4)

This connector provides access to four E1/T1 ports 5 to 8. The connector is comprised of four RJ45
connectors wired as follows:

Connector J17/1

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-5
Pin 2 RTIP-5
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-5
Pin 5 TTIP-5
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

Connector J17/2

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-6
Pin 2 RTIP-6
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-6
Pin 5 TTIP-6
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

Connector J17/3

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-7
Pin 2 RTIP-7
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-7
Pin 5 TTIP-7
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

165
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Connector J17/4

RJ-45 Pin Number Description

Pin 1 RRING-8
Pin 2 RTIP-8
Pin 3 Not Used
Pin 4 TRING-8
Pin 5 TTIP-8
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used

16.1.6 FXS Dual RJ-11 Telephone Interface (J13)

Pin Number Description

Pin 1 Not used
Pin 2 Not used
Pin 3 RING-1
Pin 4 TIP-1
Pin 5 Not used
Pin 6 Not used
Pin 7 Not used
Pin 8 Not used
Pin 9 RING-2
Pin 10 TIP-2
Pin 11 Not used
Pin 12 Not used

166
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.2 Command Set

The command set for the Telecommunications Gateway is a sub-set of the Router Command Set.
These are detailed in the “Communications Processor” document, “Advantech IP Gateway Rev.1”
accompanying this manual.

The command set is accessible only by a Personal Computer (PC) running a terminal emulation
program such as HyperTerminal or other remote control device connected to the dedicated Gateway
Console connector (J3) or Ethernet connector (J5) on the rear panel. The commands are not
accessible by the modem front control panel if fitted.

Set the terminal as follows:

Baud Rate: 9600

Data Bits: 8
Parity: No
Stop Bit: 1

Successful connection will be indicated on the terminal screen by the following prompt:

router>

Continue by typing:

enable

The response will be:

router#

16.2.1 Help
As a reminder the Help features supported by the modem are:

router# help all

The following will be displayed:

HELP: Alphabetic list of commands.

MODEL: The modem model.
SERIAL: The modem serial number.
MDATE: The modem manufacturing date.

In line Help:

Suffixing a '?' to the command displays a description of the command function.

167
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Example:

router# show running-config?

The TAB key auto-completes any command. This is a useful shortcut as well as not having to
remember all the keywords. If more than one command is possible, all alternatives are displayed.

16.2.2 Recall and Editing

↑ Recall the previous command

↓ Recall next command
← Shift left for command editing
Backspace Delete the previous character
Del Delete the current character
!! Execute previous command

16.2.3 Command Syntax

The Router commands are contained in a series of menus. The current active menu is indicated by the
prompt command. For instance the Router Root menu is indicated by the prompt: router#

Sub-menus are shown in parenthesis, for example: router(config)# indicates that commands from
the sub-menu config may be entered.

Further sub-menus are indicated following in hyphens, e.g.: router(config-controller-e1)#

To move from any sub-menu back towards the root menu, use the exit command or Ctrl-Z

The following examples illustrate the execution of two common requirements: Configuring an Ethernet
port and setting an IP address.

To configure an Ethernet port, enter the following command sequence:

router# configure terminal

router(config)#

router(config)# interface Ethernet 0

router(config-if)#

router(config-if)#no shutdown

168
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
Assuming the Ethernet interface status was ‘down’ prior to the above commands two messages will be
returned:

router(config-if)#% Link layer on interface Ethernet0, changed state to up

router(config-if)#% Link protocol on interface Ethernet0, changed state to up

To set an IP address (192.168.4.52/16 in this example) enter the following command sequence:

router# ip addresss 192.168.4.52/16

router(config-if)#

And to return to the root menu:

router(config-if)# exit

router(config)#

router(config)# exit

router#

(….or press CTRL-Z twice)

16.2.4 Commands for the Telecommunications Gateway

All of the commands for the Telecommunications Gateway Interface are contained in the Router Sub-
menu config.

Enter this menu by typing the following router menu command from the root:

router# configure terminal

The response: router(config)# will indicate successful execution of this command.

This sub-menu contains commands that allow access to sub-menus that configure the operation of the
following functions:

1. E1 Channel Controller Sub-Menu - used to set-up the parameters of the individual E1 channels.
2. Multiplexer Controller Sub Menu - used to configure Transmit and Receive sides of the multiplexer.

169
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Command following
Function prompt: Description Action
router(config)#
port:

Configure the E1 interface port Selects the sub-

controller e1 identification number
controller of an E1 <port> menu: router(config-
port (0 to 7). Default: No controller-e1)
E1 controller
selected for set-up.
port:

Configure the Mux interface port Selects the sub-

controller mux identification number
controller of a MUX <port> menu: router(config-
port (0 to 7). Default: No controller-mux)
Mux controller
selected for set-up.

16.2.5 Commands to set up individual E1 channels

Sub-menu router (config-controller-e1)

Command following
prompt:
Function Description
router(config-
controller-e1)#
clock source line: Clock sourced from the E1 line.
line
(Default)
Configure the Clock clock source
Source of an E1 port internal internal: clock (free-running).

no clock source no: Selects the default setting (E1 line clock)

framing crc4
Select Frame type Default: CRC4
framing no-crc4
payload: The external line signal is looped
loopback local back toward the network and the DS1 signal
Loopback an entire payload
reframed.
E1 (including all
loopback local
channel-groups) line line: The external line signal is looped back
toward the line and toward the network but the DS1 signal is not
router. no loopback reframed.
local
no: Resumes normal operation. (Default)

Disable an E1 shutdown shutdown: Disables E1 controller (Default)

controller no shutdown no: enables E1 controller.

170
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
16.2.6 Mux Controller set-up commands
Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux)

Command following
prompt:
Function Description
router(config-
controller-mux)#

Configure transmit Selects the sub-menu:

side parameters of transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-
Mux controller. transmit-side)

Configure receive Selects the sub-menu:

side parameters of receive-side router(config-controller-mux-
Mux controller. receive-side)

loopback local framer: The data is clocked into Tx FIFO,

framer APOC framed and looped directly to Rx
framer.
loopback local
Loop back an entire line line: Loops the incoming line side data
Mux controller loopback local back on the line side.
(including all modem modem: Loops the demodulator data on the
channels defined on
loopback local C-bus to the modulator without any
the controller)
terrestrial processing.
towards the line and
router. loopback local terrestrial: Loops the de-framed data
utopia towards the Tx framer on the terrestrial
no loopback interface side.
local no: Enables normal operation. (Default)
Selects the sub-menu:
Configure transmit
side parameters of transmit-side router(config-controller-mux-
Mux controller. transmit-side)

171
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.2.7 Mux Controller set-up commands – Transmit side

Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux-transmit-side)

Note: Unless stated otherwise the Default state of each of the following commands is not configured.

Command following
prompt:
Function router(config- Description
controller-mux-
transmit-side)#

speed: numerical value from 0 to

Configure transmit data-rate speed 200000000
data rate.
(0 to 200Mb/s)
drop e1 port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7)
Specify E1 channels <port> channel: E1 channel number (0 to 31)
to be dropped. <channel> mux-channel: Mux channel number (0 to
<mux-channel> 255)
port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7)
drop-range e1
first-channel: Lowest E1 channel
<port>
number of drop group (0 to 31)
<first-channel>
Specify E1 channel last-channel: Highest E1 channel
groups to be <last-channel> number of drop group (0 to 31)
dropped. <first-mux- first-mux-channel: Lowest Mux channel
channel>
number of group (0 to 255)
<last-mux-
channel> last-mux-channel: Highest Mux channel
number of group (0 to 255)
Configure the Value: the number of bytes.
number of bytes for payload value Select from 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256
each APOC DS-0
timeslot. (Default is 32)
Disable the transmit shutdown
side of Mux (Default: shutdown)
controller. no shutdown

172
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.2.8 Mux Controller set-up commands – Receive side

Sub-menu router (config-controller-mux-receive-side)

Note: Unless stated otherwise the Default state of each of the following commands is not configured.

Command following
prompt:
Function router(config- Description
controller-mux-
receive-side)#

speed: numerical value from 0 to

Configure receive data-rate speed 200000000
data rate.
(0 to 200Mb/s)
insert e1 port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7)
Specify E1 channels <port> channel: E1 channel number (0 to 31)
to be inserted. <channel> mux-channel: Mux channel number (0 to
<mux-channel> 255)
port: E1 interface port number (0 to 7)
insert-range e1
first-channel: Lowest E1 channel
<port>
number of insert group (0 to 31)
<first-channel>
Specify E1 channel last-channel: Highest E1 channel
groups to be <last-channel> number of insert group (0 to 31)
inserted. <first-mux- first-mux-channel: Lowest Mux channel
channel>
number of group (0 to 255)
<last-mux-
channel> last-mux-channel: Highest Mux channel
number of group (0 to 255)
Configure the Value: the number of bytes.
number of bytes for payload value Select from 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, or 256
each APOC DS-0
timeslot. (Default is 32)
Disable the receive shutdown
side of Mux (Default: shutdown)
controller. no shutdown

173
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.3 Configuration examples of AMT-70 modem equipped with PDH

multiplexer

AMT-70 modems may be configured to use internal or external timing. The source of the external
timing can be either E1/T1 interface #4 or E1/T1 interface #8. It should be noted that the interface
numbering in the configuration script starts from controller number 0 which corresponds to E1/T1 port
#1 and ends with controller number 7, which is E1/T1 port #8.

Seven example configurations are listed to help with configuration. There are a couple of important
additional configuration notes.

16.3.1.1 To change a current Insert or Drop range

First the user must remove the current active setting before entering the new values. For example if the
current drop range is drop-range e1 3 0 31 0 31 then the user must first type no drop-range
e1 3 0 31 0 31 before entering the new drop range.

16.3.1.2 To store the current configuration

To modify the start-up configuration it is necessary to copy the current running-configuration

to the startup-configuration. This can be achieved by using the command

Copy running-configuration startup-configuration

16.3.2 Example 1
One full E1 connected to the E1/T1 interface port #4 and external timing.

All 32 time slots are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the same order on the
Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 3
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data rate 2112000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 2112000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

174
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
router#show running-config
Building configuration...
Current configuration : 1027 bytes
-----------------------------
! integrity,hash(md5,wz6GgXLFGjeWLg/shPZXuw==);
! Generated by router on 30.6.2136 5:7:12
no dns use-cache
dns order hosts-then-bind
ip domain-lookup
ip domain-name local
hostname router
ip host localhost 127.0.0.1

no service timestamps debug

no service timestamps log

controller E1 0
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 1
framing no-crc4
clock source internal

no shutdown

controller E1 2
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 3
framing no-crc4
no shutdown

controller E1 4
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 5
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 6
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 7
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller Mux 0
doppler-buffer internal 10
clock source framer1

175
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
transmit-side
data-rate 2112000
drop-range E1 3 0 31 0 31
no shutdown
receive-side
data-rate 2112000
insert-range E1 3 0 31 0 31
no shutdown
loopback local framer

interface Ethernet0
ip address 192.168.4.145 255.255.0.0
mac-address 00:09:0F:22:00:07
speed auto
duplex auto
no shutdown

interface Serial1/0
no ip forward-to-the-same-net
ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0
no keepalive
no shutdown

16.3.3 Example 2
One full E1 connected to the E1/T1 interface port #8 and external timing.

All 32 time slots dropped on Transmit over the satellite side and inserted in the same order on the
Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 7
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 2112000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 2112000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

router#show running-config
Building configuration
Current configuration : 1027 bytes
-----------------------------
! integrity,hash(md5,wz6GgXLFGjeWLg/shPZXuw==);

176
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
! Generated by router on 30.6.2136 5:7:12
no dns use-cache
dns order hosts-then-bind
ip domain-lookup
ip domain-name local
hostname router
ip host localhost 127.0.0.1

no service timestamps debug

no service timestamps log

controller E1 0
framing no-crc4
clock source internal

no shutdown

controller E1 1
framing no-crc4
clock source internal

no shutdown

controller E1 2
framing no-crc4
clock source internal

no shutdown

controller E1 3
framing no-crc4
no shutdown

controller E1 4
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 5
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 6
framing no-crc4
clock source internal
no shutdown

controller E1 7
framing no-crc4
no shutdown

controller Mux 0
doppler-buffer internal 10
clock source framer2
transmit-side
data-rate 2112000
drop-range E1 7 0 31 0 31
no shutdown

177
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
receive-side
data-rate 2112000
insert-range E1 7 0 31 0 31
no shutdown
loopback local framer

interface Ethernet0
ip address 192.168.4.145 255.255.0.0
mac-address 00:09:0F:22:00:07
speed auto
duplex auto
no shutdown

interface Serial1/0
no ip forward-to-the-same-net
ip address 10.0.0.1 255.255.0.0
no keepalive
no shutdown

16.3.4 Example 3
Four full E1s connected to E1/T1 interface ports #1, #2, #3 and #4 and external timing derived
from port #4.

All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the
same order on the receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 0
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 1
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 2
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 3
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer internal 20
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 8256000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 0 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 1 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 2 0 31 64 95
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 96 127
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit

178
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 8256000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 0 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 1 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 2 0 31 64 95
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 0 31 96 127
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

16.3.5 Example 4
Four full E1s connected to E1/T1 interface ports #5, #6, #7 and #8 and external timing derived
from port #8.

All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the
same order on the Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 4
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 5
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 6
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 7
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer internal 20
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 8256000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 4 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 5 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 6 0 31 64 95
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 96 127
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 8256000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 4 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 5 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 6 0 31 64 95
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 31 96 127
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

179
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

16.3.6 Example 5
Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #3 and #4 and external timing derived from
port #4.

All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the
same order on the Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 2
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 3
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer1
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 2 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 3 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 2 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 3 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

16.3.7 Example 6
Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #7 and #8 and external timing derived from
the port #8.

All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the
same order on the Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 6
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 7
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source line
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128

180
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source framer2
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 6 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 7 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 6 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 7 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

16.3.8 Example 7
Two full E1s connected to the E1/T1 interface ports #1 and #2 using internal timing.

All 32 time slots of each E1 interface are dropped on Transmit over the satellite link and inserted in the
same order on the Receive side.

router#configure terminal
router(config)#controller e1 0
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller e1 1
router(config-controller-e1)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-e1)# no shutdown
router(config-controller-e1)#exit
router(config)#controller mux 0
router(config-controller-mux)#doppler-buffer external 128
router(config-controller-mux)#clock source internal
router(config-controller-mux)#transmit-side
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 0 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#drop-range e1 1 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux-tx)#exit
router(config-controller-mux)#receive-side
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#data-rate 4160000
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 0 0 31 0 31
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#insert-range e1 1 0 31 32 63
router(config-controller-mux-rx)#no shutdown
router(config-controller-mux)#exit
router(config)#exit
router#

All seven examples above allocate zero bandwidth for the Ethernet interface. To enable the bandwidth
over the Ethernet port, the data rate for Transmit and Receive side should be increased. Any excess of
the data rate over the required for TDM part will be assigned or added to the Ethernet bandwidth.

181
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 17 APPENDIX F TURBO

PRODUCT CODE PERFORMANCE
Typical Turbo code results for a variety of data rates are listed below:
All Graphs are SNR .v. BER

Figure 82: QPSK at 96kbps at –100dBm / Hz

182
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 83: QPSK at 256kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

183
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 84: QPSK 3MBps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

184
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 85: QPSK at 10Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

185
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 86: QPSK at 35Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

186
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 87: 8PSK at 150kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

187
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 88: 8PSK at 400kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

188
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 89: 8PSK at 16Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

189
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 90: 8PSK at 55Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

190
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 91: 16QAM at 512kbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

191
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 92: 16QAM at 6Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

192
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 93: 16QAM at 20Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

193
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

Figure 94: 16QAM at 70Mbps at –104dBm/Hz Input Power

194
 AMT-70/AMT-73/AMT-75 Installation and Operation

CHAPTER 18 APPENDIX G DVB-S2

THEORETICAL PERFORMANCE
The DVB-S2 S/N specification for DVB-S2 NORMAL Block size is listed in Figure 95 . This
data is taken directly from the DVB-S2 specification.

Mode Spectral efficiency Ideal Es/No (dB)

QPSK ¼ 0.490243 -2.35

QPSK 1/3 0.656448 -1.24
QPSK 2/5 0.791874 -0.30
QPSK ½ 0.988857 1.00
QPSK 3/5 1.188303 2.23
QPSK 2/3 1.322251 3.10
QPSK ¾ 1.487472 4.03
QPSK 4/5 1.587195 4.68
QPSK 5/6 1.654662 5.18
QPSK 8/9 1.766451 6.20
QPSK 9/10 1.788612 6.42
8PSK 3/5 1.779989 5.50
8PSK 2/3 1.980633 6.62
8PSK ¾ 2.228122 7.91
8PSK 5/6 2.478560 9.35
8PSK 8/9 2.646012 10.69
8PSK 9/10 2.679207 10.98
16APSK 2/3 2.637197 8.97
16APSK ¾ 2.966726 10.21
16APSK 4/5 3.165621 11.03
16APSK 5/6 3.300181 11.61
16APSK 8/9 3.523142 12.89
16APSK 9/10 3.567341 13.13
32APSK 3/4 3,703295 12,73
32APSK 4/5 3,951571 13,64
32APSK 5/6 4,119540 14,28
32APSK 8/9 4,397854 15,69
32APSK 9/10 4,453027 16,05
Figure 95: DVB-S2 Theoretical Performance figures

for FECFRAME length=64 800. Note that for FEC Frame SHORT 16Kbit blocks the ideal
Es/No are 0.25dB worse.

195